Sie sind auf Seite 1von 434

RNE Fundamentals

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals


All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 1

Blank Page
RNE Fundamentals 1- -2

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

This page is left blank intentionally

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 2

Objectives
RNE Fundamentals 1- -

By the end of the course, participants will be able to: Plan a standard GSM (single band and single layer) network in urban, suburban and rural areas fulfilling defined coverage probability; Choose suitable BTS site configurations for different clutter types: Omni sites/sectorized sites, Number of TRX, Antenna height and antenna type, Feeder cable. Plan site locations: To achieve planned coverage probability Inter site distance Antenna azimuth and tilt.

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 3

Objectives [cont.]
RNE Fundamentals 1- -

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

This page is left blank intentionally

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 4

Table of Contents
RNE Fundamentals 1- -

Switch to notes view!


1 Introduction 1.1 Standardisation & Documentation 1.1.1 www.3GPP.org organizational partners 1.1.2 TSG Organisation 1.1.3 Specifications and Releases 1.1.4 Specifications out of Release 1999 1.2 Radio Network Architecture 1.2.1GSM Network Architecture with out GPRS 1.2.2 GSM Network Architecture with GPRS 1.2.3 OMC-R 1.2.4 GSM Network Elements 1.2.5 RF Spectrum 1.3 Mobile Phone Systems 1.3.1 Access Methods 1.3.2 FDMA 1.3.3 TDMA 1.3.4 CDMA (Code Division Multiple Access) 1.3.5 Analogue Cellular Mobile Systems 1.3.6 AMPS (Advanced Mobile Phone System) 1.3.7 AMPS - Technical objectives 1.3.8 AMPS Frequency Range 1.3.9 TACS Total Access Communications System 1.3.10 TACS - Technical objectives 1.3.11 Different TACS-Systems 1.3.12 TACS (Total Access Communications System) Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals 1.3.13 Why digital mobile communication ? 1.3.14 GSM - Technical objectives 1.3.15 DECT (Digital European Cordless Telephone) 1.3.16 DECT - Technical objectives 1.3.17 CDMA - Technical objectives 1.3.18 CDMA - Special Features 1.3.19 CDMA - Technical objectives 1.3.20 TETRA - Features 1.3.21 TETRA - Typical Users 1.3.22 TETRA - Technical objectives 1.3.23 Universal Mobile Telecommunication System 1.4 RNP Process Overview 1.4.1 Definition of RN Requirements 1.4.2 Preliminary Network Design 1.4.3 Project Setup and Management 1.4.4 Initial Radio Network Design 1.4.5 Site Acquisition Procedure 1.4.6 Technical Site Survey 1.4.7 Basic Parameter Definition 1.4.8 Cell Design CAE Data Exchange over COF 1.4.9 Turn On Cycle 1.4.10 Site Verification and Drive Test 1.4.11 HW / SW Problem Detection 1.4.12 Basic Network Optimization 1.4.13 Network Acceptance 1.4.14 Further Optimization 2 Coverage Planning 2.1 Geo databases 2.1.1 Why are geographical data needed for Radio Network Planning ? 2.1.2 Maps are flat

Page 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 5

Table of Contents [cont.]


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

Switch to notes view!


2.1.3 Mapping the earth 2.1.4 Map Projection 2.1.5 Geodetic Ellipsoid 2.1.6 Global & Regional Ellipsoids 2.1.7 Geodetic Datum 2.1.8 Different Map Projections 2.1.9 Geo-Coordinate System 2.1.10 WGS 84 (World Geodetic System 1984) 2.1.11 Transverse Mercator Projection 2.1 Geo databases 2.1.12 Transverse Mercator Projection (e.g. UTM ) 2.1.13 Universal Transverse Mercator System 2.1.14 UTM - Definitions 2.1.15 UTM Zones (e.g. Europe) 2.1.16 UTM-System 2.1.17 UTM Zone Numbers 2.1.18 UTM-System: Example "Stuttgart" 2.1.19 Lambert Conformal Conic Projection 2.1.20 Geospatial data for Network Planning 2.1.21Creation of geospatial databases 2.1.22 Parameters of a Map 2.1.23 Raster- and Vectordata Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals 2.1.24 Rasterdata / Grid data 2.1.25 Vectordata 2.1.26 Digital Elevation Model (DEM) 2.1 Geo databases 2.1.27 Morphostructure / Land usage / Clutter (1) 2.1.28 Morphostructure (2) 2.1.29 Morphoclasses 2.1.30 Morphoclasses (2) 2.1.31Background data (streets, borders etc.) 2.1.32 Orthophoto 2.1.33 Scanned Maps 2.1.34 Buildings 2.1.35 Buildings (2) 2.1.36 Traffic density 2.1.37 Converting one single point (1a) 2.1.38 Converting one single point (1b) 2.1.39 Converting one single point (2a) 2.1.40 Converting one single point (2b) 2.1.41 Converting a list of points (3a) 2.1.42 Converting a list of points (3b) 2.1.43 Converting a list of points (3c) 2.1.44 Provider for Geospatial data 2.1.45 Links for more detailed infos

Page 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 6

Table of Contents [cont.]


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

Switch to notes view!


2.2 Antennas and Cables 2.2.1.1 The Antenna System 2.2.1.2 Antenna Theory 2.2.1.3 Antenna Data 2.2.1.4 Antenna Pattern and HPBW 2.2.1.5 EIRP 2.2.1.6 Linear Antennas 2.2.1.7 Monopole Antenna Pattern 2.2.1.8 Panel Antenna with Dipole Array 2.2.1.9 Dipole Arrangement 2.2.1.10 Omni Antenna 2.2.2 Antenna Parameters 2.2.2.1 X 65 T6 900MHz 2.5m 2.2.2.2 X 65 T6 900MHz 1.9m 2.2.2.3 X 90 T2 900MHz 2.5m 2.2.2.4 V 65 T0 900MHz 2.0m 2.2.2.5 V 90 T0 900MHz 2.0m 2.2.2.4 X 65 T6 1800MHz 1.3m 2.2.2.5 X 65 T2 1800MHz 1.3m 2.2.2.6 X 65 T2 1800MHz 1.9m 2.2.2.7 V 65 T2 1800MHz 1.3m 2.2.2.8 V 90 T2 1800MHz 1.9m 2.2.3 Cable Parameters 2.2.3.1 7/8" CELLFLEX Low-Loss Coaxial Cable 2.2.3.2 1-1/4" CELLFLEX Coaxial Cable 2.2.3.3 1-5/8" CELLFLEX Coaxial Cable 2.2.3.4 1/2" CELLFLEX Jumper Cable 2.3 Radio Propagation Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals 2.3.1 Propagation effects 2.3.1.1 Reflection 2.3.1.2 Refraction 2.3.1.3 Diffraction 2.3.1.4 Fading 2.3.1.5 Fading types 2.3.1.6 Signal Variation due to Fading 2.3.1.7 Lognormal Fading 2.4 Path Loss Prediction 2.4.1 Free Space Loss 2.4.2 Fresnel Ellipsoid 2.4.3 Fresnel Ellipsoid 2.4.4 Knife Edge Diffraction 2.4.5 Knife Edge Diffraction Function 2.4.6 "Final Solution" for Wave Propagation Calculations? 2.4.7 CCIR Recommendation 2.4.8 Mobile Radio Propagation 2.4.9 Terrain Modeling 2.4.10 Effect of Morphostructure on Propagation Loss 2.4.11 Okumura-Hata for GSM 900 2.4.12 CORRECTIONS TO THE HATA FORMULA 2.4.13 Hata-Okumura for GSM 900 2.4.14 COST 231 Hata-Okumura GSM 1800 2.4.15 Alcatel Propagation Model (Standard Propagation Model) 2.4.16 Alcatel Propagation Model 2.4.17 Exercise Path Loss 2.5 Link Budget Calculation 2.5.1 Maximum Propagation Loss (Downlink) 2.5.2 Maximum Propagation Loss (Uplink) 2.5.3 GSM900/1800 Link Budget 2.5.3 GSM900/1800 Link Budget 2.5.4 GSM1800 Link Budget 2.5.5 Additional Losses Overview

Page 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 171 172 173

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 7

Table of Contents [cont.]


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

Switch to notes view!


2.6 Coverage Probability 2.6.1 Indoor propagation aspects 2.6.2 Indoor propagation: empirical model 2.6.3 Indoor Penetration 2.6.4 Body Loss (1) 2.6.5 Body Loss (2) 2.6.6 Body Loss (3) 2.6.7 Interference Margin 2.6.8 Degradation (no FH) 2.6.9 Diversity Gain 2.6.10 Lognormal margin 2.6.11 Consideration of Signal Statistics (1) 2.6.12 Consideration of Signal Statistics (2) 2.7 Cell Range Calculation 2.7.1 Calculation of Coverage Radius R 2.7.2 Coverage Probability 2.7.3 Coverage Ranges and Hata Correction Factors 2.7.4 Conventional BTS Configuration 2.7.5 Coverage Improvement by Antenna Diversity 2.7.6 Radiation Patterns and Range 2.7.7 Improvement by Antenna Diversity and Sectorization 2.7.8 Improvement by Antenna Preamplifier Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals 2.8 Antenna Engineering 2.8.1 Omni Antennas 2.8.2 Sector Antenna 2.8.3 Typical Applications 2.8.4 Antenna Tilt 2.8.5 Mechanical Downtilt 2.8.6 Electrical Downtilt 2.8.7 Combined Downtilt 2.8.8 Assessment of Required Tilts 2.8.9 Inter Site Distance in Urban Area 2.8.10 Downtilt in Urban Area 2.8.11 Downtilt in Urban Area 2.8.12 Downtilt in Suburban and Rural Area 2.8.13 Antenna configurations 2.8.14 Antenna Configurations for Omni and Sector Sites 2.8.15 Three Sector Antenna Configuration with AD 2.8.16 Antenna Engineering Rules 2.8.17 Distortion of antenna pattern 2.8.18 Tx-Rx Decoupling (1) 2.8.19 TX-RX Decoupling (2) 2.8.20 TX-RX Decoupling (3) 2.8.21 Space Diversity 2.8.22 Power Divider 2.8.23 Power Divider 2.8.24 Panel Configurations (1) 2.8.25 Panel Configurations (2) 2.8.26 Panel Configurations (3)

Page 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 8

Table of Contents [cont.]


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

Switch to notes view!

Page

2.8 Antenna Engineering 2.8.27 Feeders 223 2.8.28 Feeder Installation Set and Connectors 224 2.8.29 Feeder Parameters 225 2.8.30 Feeder attenuation (1) 226 2.8 Antenna Engineering 2.8.31 Radiating Cables 227 2.8.32 Components of a radiating cable system 228 2.8.33 Comparison of field strength: Radiating cable and standard antenna 229 2.8.34 Example of a radiating cable in a tunnel 230 2.8.35 Microwave antennas, feeders and accessories 231 2.8.36 Parabolic antenna 232 2.8.37 High performance antenna 233 2.8.38 Horn antennas 234 2.8.39 Specific Microwave Antenna Parameters (1) 235 2.8.40 Specific Microwave Antenna Parameters (2) 236 2.8.41 Data sheet 15 GHz 237 2.8.42 Radiation pattern envelope 238 2.8.43 Feeders (1) 239 2.8.44 Feeders (2) 240 2.8.45 Feeders (3) 241 2.8.46 Feeders (4) 242 Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel 2.8.47 Feeders (5) 243 2.8.48 Antenna feeder systems (1) 244 2.8.49 Antenna feeder systems (2) 245 2.8.50 Antenna feeder systems (3) 246 2.9 Alcatel BSS 247 2.9.1 Architecture of BTS - Evolium Evolution A9100 248 2.9.2 EVOLIUMTM A9100 Base Station (1) 249 2.9.3 EVOLIUMTM A9100 Base Station (2) 250 2.9.4 EVOLIUMTM A9100 Base Station (3) 251 2.9.5 EVOLIUMTM BTS Features 252 2.9.7 Generic Configurations for A9100 G4/5 BTS 258 2.9.8 Non multi-band configurations 259 2.9.9 Multi-band configurations 260 2.9.10 Extended cell configurations 261 2.9.11 Standard configurations 262 2.9.12 TRX Types 263 2.9.12 TRX Types 264 2.9.13 BTS Output Power 265 2.9.14 Feature Power Balancing 266 2.9.15 Cell Split Feature 267 2.9.19 Cell Split Example: High Power Configuration 268 2.9.22 Indoor BTS Rack Layout 269 2.9.23 Outdoor MBO1 Evolution and MBO2 Evolution cabinets 270 2.9.24 Micro BTS types 271 2.9.25 Technical Data 272 2.9.26 BSC capacities in terms of boards 273 2.9.27 Capacity and dimensioning for E1 links 274 2.9.28 Abis and atermux allocation on LIU boards 275

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 9

Table of Contents [cont.]


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

10

Switch to notes view!


2.10 Coveradge Improvement 2.10.1 Antenna Diversity 2.10.1.1 Diversity 2.10.1.2 Selection Diversity (1) 2.10.1.3 Selection Diversity (2) 2.10.1.4 Selection Diversity (3) 2.10.1.5 Equal Gain Combining (1) 2.10.1.6 Equal Gain Combining (2) 2.10.1.7 Maximum Ratio Combining (1) 2.10.1.8 Maximum Ratio Combining (2) 2.10.1.9 Comparison of combining methods 2.10.1.10 Enhanced Diversity Combining (1) 2.10.1.11 Enhanced Diversity Combining (2) 2.10.1.12 Tx Diversity 2.10.1.12 Tx Diversity 2.10.1.12 Tx Diversity 2.10.1.12 Tx Diversity 2.10.1.12 Diversity systems in Mobile Radio Networks 2.10.1.13 Space Diversity Systems 2.10.1.14 Space Diversity - General Rules 2.10.1.15 Achievable Diversity Gain 2.10.1.16 Polarization Diversity 2.10.1.17 Principle of Polarization Diversity 2.10.1.18 Air Combining Evolium BSS - RNE2.10.1.19 FundamentalsAir Combining with Polarization Diversity 2.10.1.20 Air Combining with Space Diversity 2.10.1.21 Decoupling of Signal Branches 2.10.1.22 Cross Polarized or Hor/Ver Antenna? (1) 2.10.1.23 Cross Polarized or Hor/Ver Antenna? (2) 2.10.1.24 Conclusion on Antenna Diversity 2.10.2 Repeater Systems 2.10.2.1 Repeater Application 2.10.2.2 Repeater Block Diagram 2.10.2.3 Repeater Applications (2) 2.10.2.4 Repeater Types 2.10.2.5 Repeater for Tunnel Coverage 2.10.2.4 Repeater for Indoor coverage 2.10.2.5 Planning Aspects 2.10.2.6 Repeater Gain Limitation (1) 2.10.2.7 Repeater Gain Limitation (2) 2.10.2.8 Intermodulation Products 2.10.2.9 Repeater Link Budget 2.10.2.10 High Power TRXs 2.10.2.13 3x6 TRXs High Power Configuration 2.10.2.14 Mixed TRX Configuration 3 Traffic & Frequency Planning 3.1 Traffic Caspacity 3.1.1 Telephone System 3.1.2 Offered Traffic and Traffic Capacity 3.1.3 Definition of Erlang 3.1.4 Call Mix and Erlang Calculation 3.1.5 ERLANG B LAW (2) 3.1.6 Erlangs Formula 3.1.7 Blocking Probability (Erlang B) 3.1.8 BTS Traffic Capacity (Full Rate)

Page 276 277 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 287 288 289 290 291 292 293 294 295 296 297 298 299 300 All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 308 309 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 320 321 322 323 324 325 326 328 329 330 331

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 10

Table of Contents [cont.]


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

11

Switch to notes view!


3.2 Network Evolution 3.2.1 Network Evolution - Capacity Approach (1) 3.2.2 Network Evolution - Capacity Approach (2) 3.2.3 Network Evolution - Capacity Approach (3) 3.2.4 Network Evolution - Capacity Approach (4) 3.3 Cell Structures 3.3.1 Cell Structures and Quality 3.3.2 Cell Re-use Cluster (Omni Sites) (1) 3.3.2 Cell Re-use Cluster (Omni Sites)(2) 3.3.4 Cell Re-use Cluster (Sector Site) (1) 3.3.5 4x3 Cell Re-use Cluster (Sector Site) (2) 3.3.6 Irregular (Real) Cell Shapes 3.4 Frequency Reuse 3.4.1 GSM Frequency Spectrum 3.4.2 Impact of limited Frequency Spectrum 3.4.3 What is frequency reuse? 3.4.4 RCS and ARCS (1) 3.4.5 RCS and ARCS (2) 3.4.6 Reuse Cluster Size (1) 3.4.7 Reuse Cluster Size (2) 3.4.8 Reuse Distance 3.4.9 Frequency Reuse Distance 3.4.10 Frequency Reuse: Example 3.5 Cell Planning 3.5.1 Cell Planning - Frequency Planning (1) Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals 3.5.2 Cell Planning - Frequency Planning (2) 3.5.3 Influencing Factors on Frequency Reuse Distance 3.5.4 Conclusion 3.5.5 Examples for different frequency reuses 3.6 Interference Probability 3.6.1 Interference Theory (1) 3.6.2 Interference Theory (2) 3.6.3 CPDF - Cumulative Probability Density Function 3.6.4 Interference Probability dependent on Average Reuse 3.7 Carrier Types 3.7.1 Carrier Types - BCCH carrier 3.7.2 Carrier Types - TCH carrier 3.8 Multiple Reuse Pattern MRP 3.8.1 Meaning of multiple reuse pattern (1) 3.8.2 Meaning of multiple reuse pattern (2) 3.8.3 GSM restrictions 3.9 Intermodulation 3.9.1 Intermodulation problems (1) 3.9.2 Intermodulation problems (2) 3.9.3 Intermodulation problems (3) - Summary 3.9.4 Treating neighbor cells 3.9.5 Where can I find neighbor cells? 3.10 Manual Frequency Planning 3.10.1 Frequency planning (1) 3.10.2 Frequency planning (2) 3.10.3 Exercise: Manual frequency planning (1) 3.10.4 Exercise: Manual frequency planning (2) 3.10.5 Discussion: Subdivide Frequency Band? 3.10.6 Hint for creating a future proofed frequency plan 3.10.7 Implementing a frequency plan

Page 332 333 334 335 336 337 338 339 340 341 342 343 344 345 346 347 348 349 350 351 352 353 354 355 356 All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel 357 358 359 360 361 362 363 364 365 366 367 368 369 370 371 372 373 374 375 376 377 378 379 380 381 382 383 384 385 386

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 11

Table of Contents [cont.]


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

12

Switch to notes view!


3.11 BSCI Planning 3.11.1 BSCI allocation 3.11.2 BSIC Planning Rules 3.11.3 Spurious RACH 3.11.4 Summary 3.12 Capacity Enhancement Techniques 3.12.1 Capacity enhancement by planning 3.12.2 Capacity enhancement by adding feature 3.12.3 Capacity enhancement by adding TRX 3.12.4 Capacity enhancement by adding cells 3.12.5 Capacity enhancement by adding sites 4 Radio Interface 4.1 GSM Air Interface 4.1.1 Radio Resources 4.1.2 GSM Transmission Principles (1) 4.1.3 GSM Transmission Principles (2) 4.1.4 Advantages of Signal Processing 4.1.5 Signal Processing Chain 4.2 Channel Coding 4.2.1 Speech Coding 4.2.2 Error Protection 4.2.3 Interleaving and TDMA Frame Mapping Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals 4.2.4 Encryption 4.2.5 Burst Structure 4.2.4 Synchronisation 4.2.5 Modulation 4.2.6 Propagation Environment 4.2.7 Equalizing 4.2.8 Definition of Bit Error Rates 4.2.9 Speech Quality 4.2.10 Dependence of BER on Noise and Interference 4.2.13 Frequency Hopping (1) 4.2.14 Frequency Hopping (2) 4.2.15 The OSI Reference Model 4.2.16 GSM Burst Types (1) 4.2.17 GSM Burst Types (2) 4.2.18 Logical Channels 4.2.19 Possible Channel Combinations 4.2.20 Channel Mapping (1) 4.2.21 Channel Mapping (2) 4.2.22 TDMA Frame Structure for TCHs

Page 387 388 389 390 391 392 393 394 395 396 397 398 399 400 401 402 403 404 405 406 407 408 All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel 409 410 411 412 413 414 415 416 417 418 419 420 421 422 423 424 425 426 427

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 12

Blank Page
RNE Fundamentals 1 - - 13

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

This page is left blank intentionally

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 13

RNE Fundamentals -

1- -

14

1 Introduction

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 14

1 Intruduction

1.1 Standardisation & Documentation


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

15

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 15

1.1 Standardisation & Documentation

1.1.1 www.3GPP.org organizational partners


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

16

Project supported by
ARIB Association of Radio Industries and Businesses (Japan) CWTS China Wireless Telecommunication Standard group ETSI European Telecommunications Standards Institut T1 Standards Committee T1 Telecommunication (US) TTA Telecommunications Technology Association (Korea) TTC Telecommunication Technology Committee (Japan)

The Organizational Partners shall determine the general policy and strategy of 3GPP and perform the following tasks:
Approval and maintenance of the 3GPP scope Maintenance the Partnership Project Description Taking decisions on the creation or cessation of Technical Specification Groups, and approving their scope and terms of reference Approval of Organizational Partner funding requirements Allocation of human and financial resources provided by the Organizational Partners to the Project Co-ordination Group

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

Source: www.3gpp.org

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 16

1.1 Standardisation & Documentation

1.1.2 TSG Organisation


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

17

TSG ORGANIZATION
Project Co-ordination Group (PCG)

TSG GERAN
GSM EDGE Radio Access Network

TSG RAN
Radio Access Networks

TSG SA
Services & System Aspects

TSG CT
Core Network & Terminals

GERAN WG1
Radio Aspects

RAN WG1
Radio Layer 1 specification

SA WG1
Services

CT WG1 (ex CN1)


MM/CC/SM (lu)

GERAN WG2
Protocol Aspects

RAN WG2 Radio Layer2 &3 spec

SA WG2
Architecture

GERAN WG3
Terminal Testing

RAN WG3
UTRAN O&M requirements

SA WG3
Security

CT WG3 (ex CN3)


Networks Interworking

RAN WG4
Radio &Protocol Aspects

SA WG4
Codec SA WG5
Telecom Management

CT WG4 (ex CN4)


MAP/GTP/BCH/SS

RAN WG5 (ex T1)


Mobile TerminalTesting

CT WG5 (ex CN5)


Open Service Access
CT WG6 (ex T3)
Card Application Aspects

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

Source: www.3gpp.org

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 17

1.1 Standardisation & Documentation

1.1.3 Specifications and Releases


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

18

GSM/Edge Releases: http://www.3gpp.org/specs/releases.htm


TR 41.103 GSM Phase 2+ Release 5
Freeze date: March - June 2002

TR 41.102 GSM Phase 2+ Release 4


Freeze date: March 2001

TR 01.01 Phase 2+ Release 1999


Freeze date: March 2000

For the latest specification status information please go to the 3GPP Specifications database: http://www.3gpp.org/ftp/Information/Databases/Spec_Status/ The latest versions of specifications can be found on ftp://ftp.3gpp.org/specs/latest/

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

TS Technical Specification TR Technical Report

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 18

1.1 Standardisation & Documentation

1.1.4 Specifications out of Release 1999


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

19

TR 01.04 Abbreviations and acronyms TS 03.22 Functions related to Mobile Station (MS) in idle mode and group receive mode TR 03.30 Radio Network Planning Aspects TS 04.04 Layer 1 - General Requirements TS 04.06 Mobile Station - Base Stations System (MS - BSS) Interface Data Link (DL) Layer Specification TS 04.08 Mobile radio interface layer 3 specification TS 05.05 Radio Transmission and Reception TS 05.08 Radio Subsystem Link Control TS 08.06 Signalling Transport Mechanism Specification for the Base Station System - Mobile Services Switching Centre (BSS-MSC) Interface TS 08.08 Mobile-services Switching Centre - Base Station system (MSCBSS) Interface Layer 3 Specification

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 19

1 Intruduction

1.2 Radio Network Architecture


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

20

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 20

1.2 Radio Network Architecture

1.2.1GSM Network Architecture with out GPRS


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

21

MS

GSM CircuitCircuit-switching:
Um (Radio) Abis
MSC MSC

MS - BTS

LapDm
(GSM specific)

BTS BSC

BTS BSC

BTS - BSC BSC - MSC MSCMSC-VLR (SM(SM-G)MSCG)MSC-HLR HLRHLR-VLR (SM(SM-G)MSCG)MSC-MSC MSCMSC-EIR VLRVLR-VLR HLRHLR-AuC MSCMSC-GCR

LapD
(ISDN type)

A B C D E F G H I PSTN ISDN

(SS7 basic) + BSSAP


(BSSAP = BSSMAP + DTAP)

E B G
VLR VLR

C D
HLR

F H

(SS7 basic) + MAP

AuC EIR

GCR

PSTN / ISDN

AuC

MSCMSC-PSTN (SS7 basic) + TUP or ISUP MSCMSC-ISDN

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

AuC Authentication Center BTS Base Transceiver Station BSC Base Station Controller BSS Base Station System EIR Equipment Identity Register HLR Home Location Register ISDN Integrated Services Digital Network MS Mobile Station OMC-R Operation and Maintenance Centre Radio PSTN Public Switched Telephone Network VLR Visitor Location Register GCR Group Call Register -The general architecture of GSM is maintained. In addition, a network function is required which is used for registration of the broadcast call attributes, the Group Call Register.

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 21

1.2 Radio Network Architecture

1.2.2 GSM Network Architecture with GPRS


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

22

MS
BSS with PCU

GSM PacketPacket-switching (GPRS/EDGE):


Um (Radio)
BSS with PCU

MS - BTS

LAPDm
(GSM specific)

SGSN

SGSN

MSC

Gb

BSS - SGSN SGSNSGSN-SGSN SGSN-GGSN SGSN SGSNSGSN-HLR GGSNGGSN-HLR SGSNSGSN-EIR SGSNSGSN-MSC/VLR GGSNGGSN-Data Network

BSSGP IP IP SS7 IP/SS7 SS7 SS7 IP

Gn
GGSN

Gs Gn Gn Gr Gc
HLR EIR

Gf

Gr Gc Gf Gs Gi

Data Network
Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

Note: according to GSM 03.60, the PCU function (Packet Control Unit) may be implemented on the BTS, the BSC or the SGSN site. MFS Multi BSS Fast Packet Server A935 PSTN Public Switched Telephone Network SGSN Serving GPRS Support Node GGSN Gateway GPRS Support Node VLR Visitor Location Register

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 22

1.2 Radio Network Architecture

1.2.3 OMC-R
RNE Fundamentals 1- -

23

BSS OMCOMC-G OMCOMC-R SGSN Gb MS BTS BSC Alcatel 9135 MFS TC A Gn

GPRS CN

GGSN

NSS SSP + RCP

BTS A bis A ter

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

GPRS Core Network (CN): Alcatel 1000 GPRS Packet Control Unit (PCU) function for several BSS: Alcatel 9135 MFS TC Transcoder

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 23

1.2 Radio Network Architecture

1.2.4 GSM Network Elements


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

24

Base Station System BSS


Base Transceiver Station BTS Base Station Controller BSC

Network Subsystem NSS


Mobile Services Switching Center MSC Visitor Location Register VLR Home Location Register HLR Authentication Center AuC Equipment Identity Register EIR

Terminal Equipment
Mobile Station MS

Operation and Maintenance CenterRadio OMC-R

Operation and Maintenance Center OMC Multi-BSS Fast Packet Server (GPRS) MFS Serving GPRS Support Node SGSN Gateway GPRS Support Node GGSN

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 24

1.2 Radio Network Architecture

1.2.5 RF Spectrum
RNE Fundamentals 1- -

25

System GSM 450 GSM 480 GSM 850 GSM 900 E-GSM DCS 1800 (GSM) PCS 1900 (GSM)

Total Bandwidth Uplink frequency band /MHz 2x7.5MHz 450.4-457.6 2x7.2MHz 2x25MHz 2x25MHz 2x35MHz 2x75MHz 2x60MHz 478.8-486 824-849 890-915 880-915 1710-1785 1850-1910

Downlink frequency band /MHz 460.4-467.6 488.8-496 869-894 935-960 925-960 1805-1880 1930-1990

Carrier Spacing 200 kHz 200 kHz 200 kHz 200 kHz 200 kHz 200 kHz 200 kHz

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

AMPS : UK TACS : UK DECT: Cordless CDMA: System of next Generation TETRA: Digital communication System for Commercial use Frequency Ranges depends on country.

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 25

1 Intruduction

1.3 Mobile Phone Systems


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

26

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 26

1.3 Mobile Phone Systems Access Methods

1.3.1 Access Methods


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

27

FDMA (Frequency Division Multiple Access)

TDMA (Time Division Multiple Access)

CDMA (Code Division Multiple Access)

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 27

1.3 Mobile Phone Systems Access Methods

1.3.2 FDMA
@@SECTIONTITLE - @@MODULETITLE @@SECTION - @@MODULE - 25

Used for standard analog cellular mobile systems (AMPS, TACS, NMT etc.) Each user is assigned a discrete slice of the RF spectrum Permits only one user per channel since it allows the user to use the channel 100% of the time.

@@PRODUCT - @@COURSENAME

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 28

1.3 Mobile Phone Systems Access Methods

1.3.3 TDMA
RNE Fundamentals 1- -

29

Multiple users share RF carrier on a time slot basis Carriers are sub-divided into timeslots Information flow is not continuous for an user, it is sent and received in "bursts"

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 29

1.3 Mobile Phone Systems Access Methods

1.3.4 CDMA (Code Division Multiple Access)


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

30

Multiple access spread spectrum technique Each user is assigned a sequence code during a call No time division; all users use the entire carrier

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

What is CDMA ? One of the most important concepts to any cellular telephone system is that of "multiple access", meaning that multiple, simultaneous users can be supported. In other words, a large number of users share a common pool of radio channels and any user can gain access to any channel (each user is not always assigned to the same channel). A channel can be thought of as merely a portion of the limited radio resource which is temporary allocated for a specific purpose, such as someone's phone call. A multiple access method is a definition of how the radio spectrum is divided into channels and how channels are allocated to the many users of the system.

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 30

1.3 Mobile Phone Systems Access Methods

1.3.5 Analogue Cellular Mobile Systems


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

31

Analogue transmission of speech One TCH/Channel Only FDMA (Frequency Division Multiple Access) Different Systems
AMPS (Countries: USA) TACS (UK, I, A, E, ...) NMT (SF, S, DK, N, ...) ...

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

NMT: Nordic Mobile Telephone System. Allianz von Nordischen Systembetreibern. AMPS: Advanced Mobile Phone System TACS: Total Access Communications System UK United Kingdom I Italy A Austria E Spain SF Finnland S Schweden DK Denmark N Norwegen

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 31

1.3 Mobile Phone Systems Access Methods

1.3.6 AMPS (Advanced Mobile Phone System)


RNE Fundamentals 1 - - 32

Analogue cellular mobile telephone system Predominant cellular system operating in the US Original system: 666 channels (624 voice and 42 control channels) EAMPS - Extended AMPS Current system: 832 channels (790 voice, 42 control); has replaced AMPS as the US standard NAMPS - Narrowband AMPS New system that has three times more voice channels than EAMPS with no loss of signal quality Backward compatible: if the infrastructure is designed properly, older phones work on the newer systems

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 32

1.3 Mobile Phone Systems Access Methods

1.3.7 AMPS - Technical objectives


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

33

Technology RF frequency band Channel Spacing Carriers Timeslots Mobile Power Transmission HO Roaming

FDMA 825 - 890 MHz 30 kHz 666 (832) 1 0.6 - 4 W Voice, (data) possible possible

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 33

1.3 Mobile Phone Systems Access Methods

1.3.8 AMPS Frequency Range


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

34

Extended AMPS Uplink Channel number 991 1023 1 AMPS 666 667 799

Frequency of Channel 824.040 825.030 844.980 845.010 (MHz) 845.010 Downlink Channel number Frequency of Channel (MHz)

Extended AMPS AMPS 666 667 799 893.980

991 1023 1

Duplex distance 45 MHz

869.040 870.030 889.980

890.010

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 34

1.3 Mobile Phone Systems Access Methods

1.3.9 TACS Total Access Communications System


RNE Fundamentals 1 - - 35

Analogue cellular mobile telephone system The UK TACS system was based on the US AMPS system TACS - Original UK system that has either 600 or 1000 channels (558 or 958 voice channels, 42 control channels) RF frequency band: 890 - 960 Uplink: 890-915 Downlink: 935-960 Channel spacing: 25 KHz

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 35

1.3 Mobile Phone Systems Access Methods

1.3.10 TACS - Technical objectives


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

36

Technology RF frequency band Channel Spacing Carriers Timeslots Mobile Power Transmission HO Roaming

FDMA 890 - 960 MHz 25 kHz 1000 1 0.6 - 10 W Voice , (data) possible possible

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

Tacs disturb GSM because the same frequency- range!

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 36

1.3 Mobile Phone Systems Access Methods

1.3.11 Different TACS-Systems


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

37

ETACS - Extended TACS


Current UK system that has 1320 channels (1278 voice, 42 control) and has replaced TACS as the UK standard

ITACS and IETACS - International (E)TACS


Minor variation of TACS to allow operation outside of the UK by allowing flexibility in assigning the control channels

JTACS - Japanese TACS


A version of TACS designed for operation in Japan

NTACS - Narrowband TACS


New system that has three times as many voice channels as ETACS with no loss of signal quality

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 37

1.3 Mobile Phone Systems Access Methods

1.3.12 TACS (Total Access Communications System)


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

38

Original concept (1000 channels)

Mobile Station TX (Base Station TX) Number of Channel

E-TACS - 1320 Channels

1st Assignment in the UK (600 channels)

1329

2047

11

23

44

Frequency of channel [Mhz]

Organisatio nA 872.0125 (917.0125 ) 889.9625 (934.9625 ) 889.9875 (934.9875 ) 890.0125 (935.0125 )

34 32 4 3 Organisatio nB

60 0

1000

Borders of channels [Mhz]

872 917

890 935

905 (950 )

915 (960 )

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 38

1.3 Mobile Phone Systems Access Methods

1.3.13 Why digital mobile communication ?


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

39

Easy adaptation to digital networks Digital signaling serves for flexible adaptation to operational needs Possibility to realize a wide spectrum of non-voice services Digital transmission allows for high cellular implementation flexibility Digital signal processing gain results in high interference immunity Privacy of radio transmission ensured by digital voice coding and encryption Cost and performance trends of modern microelectronics are in favour of a digital solution

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 39

1.3 Mobile Phone Systems Access Methods

1.3.14 GSM - Technical objectives


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

40

Technology RF frequency band Channel Spacing Carriers Timeslots Mobile Power (average/max) BTS Power class MS sensitivity BTS sensitivity Transmission HO Roaming

TDMA/FDMA 890 - 960 MHz 200 kHz 124 8 2 W/ 8 W 10 ... 40 W - 102 dBm - 104 dBm Voice, data possible possible

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 40

1.3 Mobile Phone Systems Access Methods

1.3.15 DECT (Digital European Cordless Telephone)


RNE Fundamentals 1 - - 41

European Standard for Cordless Communication Using TDMA-System Traditional Applications


Domestic use ("Cordless telephone") Cordless office applications

Combination possible with


ISDN GSM

High flexibility for different applications

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 41

1.3 Mobile Phone Systems Access Methods

1.3.16 DECT - Technical objectives


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

42

Technology RF frequency band Channel Spacing Carriers Timeslots Mobile Power (average/max) BTS Power class MS sensitivity BTS sensitivity Transmission HO

TDMA/FDMA 1880 - 1900 MHz 1.728 MHz 10 12 (duplex) 10 mW/250 mW 250 mW -83 dBm -83 dBm Voice, data possible

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

Frequency Range with 10 carriers, 1728 KHz channel spacing 10 carrier 24 timeslots 120 Duplex channels cell radius 200-300 meter no Equalizer HO und Macro Diversity Optional

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 42

1.3 Mobile Phone Systems Access Methods

1.3.17 CDMA - Technical objectives


RNE Fundamentals 1 - - 43

Spread spectrum technology (Code Division Multiple Access) Several users occupy continuously one CDMA channel (bandwidth: 1.25 MHz) The CDMA channel can be re-used in every cell Each user is addressed by
A specific code and Selected by correlation processing

Orthogonal codes provides optimum isolation between users

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 43

1.3 Mobile Phone Systems Access Methods

1.3.18 CDMA - Special Features


RNE Fundamentals 1 - - 44

Vocoder allows variable data rates Soft handover Open and closed loop power control Multiple forms of diversity Data, fax and short message services possible

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

Vocoder: 8Kbps oder 13 Kbps. Multiple Forms of diversity: w Frequency diversity (Spektrum 1.25 MHz) w Spatial diversity (2 different receiving Antennas) w Path diversity (Usage of Multi-path propagation) w Time diversity (Interleaving, error correction codes.)

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 44

1.3 Mobile Phone Systems Access Methods

1.3.19 CDMA - Technical objectives


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

45

Technology RF frequency band Channel Spacing Channels per 1250 kHz Mobile Power (average/max) Transmission HO ("Soft handoff") Roaming

CDMA 869-894 / 824-849 or 1900 MHz 1250 kHz 64 1-6.3 W / 6.3 W Voice, data possible possible

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 45

1.3 Mobile Phone Systems Access Methods

1.3.20 TETRA - Features


RNE Fundamentals 1 - - 46

Standard for a frequency efficient european digital trunked radio communication system (defined in 1990) Possibility of connections with simultaneous transmission of voice and data Encryption at two levels:
Basic level which uses the air interface encryption End-to-end encryption (specifically intended for public safety users)

Open channel operation "Direct Mode" possible


Communication between two MS without connecting via a BTS

MS can be used as a repeater

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 46

1.3 Mobile Phone Systems Access Methods

1.3.21 TETRA - Typical Users


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

47

Public safety
Police (State, Custom, Military, Traffic) Fire brigades Ambulance service ...

Railway, transport and distribution companies

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

For use in: w Police, ambulance and fire Services w Security Services w Military w Transport Services w Closed User Groups (CUGs) w Factory site services

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 47

1.3 Mobile Phone Systems Access Methods

1.3.22 TETRA - Technical objectives


RNE Fundamentals 1 - - 48

Technology RF frequency band Channel Spacing Carriers Timeslots Mobile Power (3 Classes) BTS Power class MS sensitivity BTS sensitivity Transmission HO Roaming

TDMA/FDMA 380 - 400 MHz 25 or 12.5 KHz not yet specified 4 1, 3, 10 W 0.6 - 25 W -103 dBm -106 dBm Voice, data, images, short message possible possible

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 48

1.3 Mobile Phone Systems Access Methods

1.3.23 Universal Mobile Telecommunication System


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

49

Third generation mobile communication system Combining existing mobile services (GSM, CDMA etc.) and fixed telecommunications services More capacity and bandwidth More services (Speech, Video, Audio, Multimedia etc.) Worldwide roaming "High" subscriber capacity

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

http://www.vtt.fi/tte/nh/UMTS/

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 49

1 Intruduction

1.4 RNP Process Overview


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

50

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 50

1.4 RNP Process Overview

1.4.1 Definition of RN Requirements


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

51

The Request for Quotation (RfQ) from the customer prescribes the requirements mainly Coverage
Definition of coverage probability
Percentage of measurements above level threshold

Definition of covered area

Traffic
Definition of Erlang per square kilometer Definition of number of TRX in a cell Mixture of circuit switched and packed switched traffic

QoS
Call success rate RxQual, voice quality, throughput rates, ping time

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 51

1.4 RNP Process Overview

1.4.2 Preliminary Network Design


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

52

The preliminary design lays the foundation to create the Bill of Quantity (BoQ)
List of needed network elements

Coverage Plots
Expected receiving level

Definition of roll out phases


Areas to be covered Number of sites to be installed Date, when the roll out takes place.

Geo data procurement


Digital Elevation Model DEM/Topographic map Clutter map

Network architecture design


Planning of BSC and MSC locations and their links

Definition of standard equipment configurations dependent on


clutter type traffic density

Frequency spectrum from license conditions

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 52

1.4 RNP Process Overview

1.4.3 Project Setup and Management


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

53

This phase includes all tasks to be performed before the on site part of the RNP process takes place. This ramp up phase includes:
Geo data procurement if required Setting up general rules of the project Define and agree on reporting scheme to be used
Coordination of information exchange between the different teams which are involved in the project

Each department/team has to prepare its part of the project Definition of required manpower and budget Selection of project database (MatrixX)

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 53

1.4 RNP Process Overview

1.4.4 Initial Radio Network Design


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

54

Area surveys
As well check of correctness of geo data

Frequency spectrum partitioning design RNP tool calibration


For the different morpho classes:
Performing of drive measurements Calibration of correction factor and standard deviation by comparison of measurements to predicted received power values of the tool

Definition of search areas (SAM Search Area Map)


A team searches for site locations in the defined areas The search team should be able to speak the national language

Selection of number of sectors/TRX per site together with project management and customer Get real design acceptance from customer based on coverage prediction and predefined design level thresholds

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 54

1.4 RNP Process Overview

1.4.5 Site Acquisition Procedure


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

55

Delivery of site candidates

Site candidate acceptance and Several site candidates shall be the result ranking
out of the site location search If the reported site is accepted as candidate, then it is ranked according to its quality in terms of
Radio transmission
-High visibility on covered area -No obstacles in the near field of the antennas -No interference from other systems/antennas

Find alternative sites


If no site candidate or no satisfactory candidate can be found in the search area Definition of new SAM (Search Area Map) Possibly adaptation of radio network design

Check and correct SAR (Site Acquisition Report)


Location information Land usage Object (roof top, pylon, grassland) information Site plan

Installation costs
-Installation possibilities -Power supply -Wind and heat

Maintenance costs
-Accessibility -Rental rates for object -Durability of object

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 55

1.4 RNP Process Overview

1.4.6 Technical Site Survey


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

56

Agree on an equipment installation solution satisfying the needs of


RNE Radio Network Engineer Transmission planner Site engineer Site owner

BTS/Node B location Power and feeder cable mount Transmission equipment installation Final Line Of Site (LOS) confirmation for microwave link planning
E.g. red balloon of around half a meter diameter marks target location

The Technical Site Survey Report (TSSR) defines


Antenna type, position, bearing/orientation and tilt Mast/pole or wall mounting position of antennas EMC rules are taken into account
Radio network engineer and transmission planner check electro magnetic compatibility (EMC) with other installed devices

If the site is not acceptable or the owner disagrees with all suggested solutions
The site will be rejected Site acquisition team has to organize a new date with the next site from the ranking list

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 56

1.4 RNP Process Overview

1.4.7 Basic Parameter Definition


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

57

After installation of equipment the basic parameter settings are used for
Commissioning
Functional test of BTS and VSWR check

Cell design CAE data to be defined for all cells are for example:
CI/LAC/BSIC Frequencies Neighborhood/cell handover relationship Transmit power Cell type (macro, micro, umbrella, )

Call tests

RNEs define cell design data Operations field service generates the basic software using the cell design CAE data

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 57

1.4 RNP Process Overview

1.4.8 Cell Design CAE Data Exchange over COF


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

58

ACIE A9156 RNO


OMC 1

A955 V5 /A9155 V6 RNP

COF
A9155 PRC Generator Module

ACIE

Conversion

OMC 2

3rd Party RNP or Database


Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

POLO BSS Software offline production

ACIE = PRC file


All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

ACIE ASCII Configuration Import Export


PRC Provisioning Radio Configuration SC Supervised Configuration COF CMA Offsite CMA Customer Management Application CAE Customer Application Engineering

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 58

1.4 RNP Process Overview

1.4.9 Turn On Cycle


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

59

The network is launched step by step during the TOC A single step takes typically two or three weeks
Not to mix up with rollout phases, which take months or even years

For each step the RNE has to define TOC Parameter


Cells to go on air Determination of frequency plan Cell design CAE parameter

Each step is finished with the Turn On Cycle Activation


Upload PRC/ACIE files into OMC-R Unlock sites

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 59

1.4 RNP Process Overview

1.4.10 Site Verification and Drive Test


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

60

RNE performs drive measurement to compare the real coverage with the predicted coverage of the cells. If coverage holes or areas of high interference are detected
Adjust the antenna tilt and orientation

Verification of cell design CAE data To fulfill heavy acceptance test requirements, it is absolutely essential to perform such a drive measurement. Basic site and area optimization reduces the probability to have unforeseen mysterious network behavior afterwards.

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 60

1.4 RNP Process Overview

1.4.11 HW / SW Problem Detection


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

61

Problems can be detected due to drive tests or equipment monitoring


Defective equipment
will trigger replacement by operation field service

Software bugs Incorrect parameter settings


are corrected by using the OMC or in the next TOC

Faulty antenna installation


Wrong coverage footprints of the site will trigger antenna re-alignments

If the problem is serious


Lock BTS Detailed error detection Get rid of the fault Eventually adjusting antenna tilt and orientation

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 61

1.4 RNP Process Overview

1.4.12 Basic Network Optimization


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

62

Network wide drive measurements


It is highly recommended to perform network wide drive tests before doing the commercial opening of the network Key performance indicators (KPI) are determined The results out of the drive tests are used for basic optimization of the network

Basic optimization
All optimization tasks are still site related Alignment of antenna system Adding new sites in case of too large coverage holes Parameter optimization
No traffic yet -> not all parameters can be optimized

Basic optimization during commercial service


If only a small number of new sites are going on air the basic optimization will be included in the site verification procedure

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 62

1.4 RNP Process Overview

1.4.13 Network Acceptance


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

63

Acceptance drive test Calculation of KPI according to acceptance requirements in contract Presentation of KPI to the customer Comparison of key performance indicators with the acceptance targets in the contract The customer accepts
the whole network only parts of it step by step

Now the network is ready for commercial launch

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 63

1.4 RNP Process Overview

1.4.14 Further Optimization


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

64

Network is in commercial operation Network optimization can be performed Significant traffic allows to use OMC based statistics by using A9156 RNO and A9185 NPA End of optimization depends on contract and mutual agreement between Alcatel and customer
Usually, Alcatel is only involved during the first optimization activities directly after opening the network commercially

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 64

RNE Fundamentals -

1- -

65

2 Coverage Planning

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 65

2 Coverage Planning

2.1 Geo databases


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

66

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 66

2.1 Geo databases

2.1.1 Why are geographical data needed for Radio Network Planning ?
RNE Fundamentals 1- -

67

Propagation models depend on geographical data Geographical information for site acquisition
Latitude (East/West) / Longitude (North/South) Rectangular coordinates (e.g. UTM coordinates)

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 67

2.1 Geo databases

2.1.2 Maps are flat


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

68

Latitude

x, y Longitude

Problem: Earth is 3D, the maps are 2D

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 68

2.1 Geo databases

2.1.3 Mapping the earth


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

69

The Earth is a very complex shape To map the geography of the earth, a reference model (-> Geodetic Datum) is needed The model needs to be simple so that it is easy to use It needs to include a Coordinate system which allows the positions of objects to be uniquely identified It needs to be readily associated with the physical world so that its use is intuitive

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 69

2.1 Geo databases

2.1.4 Map Projection


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

70

Ellipsoid
e.g. WGS84, International 1924

Geodetic Datum
e.g. WGS84, ED50

Map Projection
e.g. Transverse Mercator (UTM), Lambert Conformal Conic

Geocoordinate System
e.g. UTM

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 70

2.1 Geo databases

2.1.5 Geodetic Ellipsoid


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

71

Definition: A mathematical surface (an ellipse rotated around the earth's polar axis) which provides a convenient model of the size and shape of the earth. The ellipsoid is chosen to best meet the needs of a particular map datum system design. Reference ellipsoids are usually defined by semi-major (equatorial radius) and flattening (the relationship between equatorial and polar radii).

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 71

2.1 Geo databases

2.1.6 Global & Regional Ellipsoids


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

72

Global ellipsoids e.g. WGS84, GRS80


Center of ellipsoid is Center of gravity Worldwide consistence of all maps around the world

Regional ellipsoids e.g. Bessel, Clarke, Hayford, Krassovsky


Best fitting ellipsoid for a part of the world (local optimized) Less local deviation

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 72

2.1 Geo databases

2.1.7 Geodetic Datum


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

73

A Geodetic Datum is a Reference System which includes:


A local or global Ellipsoid One Fixpoint

Attention: Referencing geodetic coordinates to the wrong map datum can result in position errors of hundreds of meters

Info: In most cases the shift, rotation and scale factor of a Map Datum is relative to the satellite map datum WGS84.
All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 73

2.1 Geo databases

2.1.8 Different Map Projections


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

74

Cylindrical
e.g. UTM, Gauss-Krueger

Conical
e.g.Lambert Conformal Conic

Planar/Azimuthal

Info: In 90% of the cases we will have a cylindrical projection in 10% of the cases a conical projection

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 74

2.1 Geo databases

2.1.9 Geo-Coordinate System


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

75

To simplify the use of maps a Cartesian Coordinates is used To avoid negative values a
False Easting value and a False Northing value is added

Also a scaling factor is used to minimize the projection error over the whole area

X = Easting Y = Northing

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 75

2.1 Geo databases

2.1.10 WGS 84 (World Geodetic System 1984)


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

76

Most needed Geodetic Datum in the world today (Satellite Datum) It is the reference frame used by the U.S. Department of Defense is defined by the National Imagery and Mapping Agency (NIMA) The Global Positioning System (GPS) system is based on the World Geodetic System 1984 (WGS-84). Optimal adaption to the surface of the earth

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 76

2.1 Geo databases

2.1.11 Transverse Mercator Projection


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

77

Projection cylinder is rotated 90 degrees from the polar axis (transverse) Geometric basis for the UTM and the Gauss-Krueger Map Projection Conformal Map projection

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 77

2.1 Geo databases

2.1.12 Transverse Mercator Projection (e.g. UTM )


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

78

Middle-Meridian

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 78

2.1 Geo databases

2.1.13 Universal Transverse Mercator System


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

79

60 zones, each 6o (60 6o = 360o ) 3o around each center meridian Beginning at 180o longitude (measured eastward from Greenwich)

Zone number = (center meridian + 183o ) / 6o

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 79

2.1 Geo databases

2.1.14 UTM - Definitions


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

80

False Easting: 500 000 m (Middle-meridian x = 500 000 m) False Northing: Northern Hemisphere: 0 m Southern Hemisphere: 10 000 000 m Scaling Factor: 0,9996 (used to minimize the projection error over the whole area)

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 80

2.1 Geo databases

2.1.15 UTM Zones (e.g. Europe)


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

81

UTM-Zones

-6

-3

9 15 21 27 33 39 Middle-Meridian

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 81

2.1 Geo databases

2.1.16 UTM-System
RNE Fundamentals 1- -

82

UTM-System
False origin on the central meridian of the zone has an easting of 500,000 meters. All eastings have a positive values for the zone Eastings range from 100,000 to 900,000 meters The 6 Degree zone ranges from 166,667 to 833,333 m, leaving about a 0.5 overlap at each end of the zone (valid only at the equator) This allows for overlaps and matching between zones

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 82

2.1 Geo databases

2.1.17 UTM Zone Numbers


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

83

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 83

2.1 Geo databases

2.1.18 UTM-System: Example "Stuttgart"


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

84

Transformation: latitude / longitude UTM system

North 48o 45' 13.5'' East 9o 11' 7.5''

y = 5 400 099 m x = 513 629 m

UTM-Zone: 32 Middle meridian: 9o (9o = 500 000 m False Easting)

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 84

2.1 Geo databases

2.1.19 Lambert Conformal Conic Projection


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

85

Maps an ellipsoid onto a cone whose central axis coincides with the polar axis

Cone touches the ellipsoid => One standard parallel (1SP) (e.g. NTF-System in France)

Cutting edges of cone and ellipsoid => Two standard parallels (2SP) (e.g. Lambert-Projection in Austria)

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 85

2.1 Geo databases

2.1.20 Geospatial data for Network Planning


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

86

DEM (Digital Elevation Model)/ Topography Morphostructure / Land usage / Clutter Satellite Photos / Orthoimages Scanned Maps Background data (streets, borders, coastlines, etc. ) Buildings Traffic data

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 86

2.1 Geo databases

2.1.21Creation of geospatial databases


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

87

Satellite imagery

Digitizing maps Aerial photography

Geospatial data
Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 87

2.1 Geo databases

2.1.22 Parameters of a Map


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

88

Coordinate system Map Projection (incl. Geodetic Datum) Location of the map (Area ) Scale:
macrocell planning 1:50000 - 1:100000 microcell planning 1:500 -1:5000

Thematic Source Date of Production

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 88

2.1 Geo databases

2.1.23 Raster- and Vectordata


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

89

Raster data
DEM /Topography Morphostructure / Land usage / Clutter Traffic density

Vector data
Background data (streets, borders, coastlines, etc. ) Buildings

(x1,y1) (xn,yn)

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 89

2.1 Geo databases

2.1.24 Rasterdata / Grid data


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

90

Pixel-oriented data Stored as row and column Each Pixel stored in one or two byte Each Pixel contents information (e.g. morphoclass, colour of a scanned map, elevation of a DEM)

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 90

2.1 Geo databases

2.1.25 Vectordata
RNE Fundamentals 1- -

91

Vector mainly used are: airport, coastline, highway, main roads, secondary roads, railway, rivers/lakes Each vector contents
Info about kind of vector (x1,y1) (e.g. street, coastline) A series of several points Each point has a corresponded x / y -value (e.g. in UTM System or as Long/Lat) Info about Map projection and used Geodetic Datum

(xn,yn )

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 91

2.1 Geo databases

2.1.26 Digital Elevation Model (DEM)


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

92

Raster dataset that shows terrain features such as hills and valleys Each element (or pixel) in the DEM image represents the terrain elevation at that location Resolution in most cases: 20 m for urban areas 50-100 m for other areas DEM are typically generated from topographic maps, stereo satellite images, or stereo aerial photographs

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 92

2.1 Geo databases

2.1.27 Morphostructure / Land usage / Clutter (1)


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

93

Land usage classification according to the impact on wave propagation In most cases: 7...14 morpho classes Resolution in most cases: 20 m for cities 50100m other areas for radio network planning

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

The clutter files describe the land cover (dense urban, buildings, residential, forest, open, villages....). Ground is represented by a grid map where each bin is characterised by a code corresponding to a main type of cover (a clutter class). The clutter maps are 8 bits/pixel (256 classes)-raster maps, they show an image with a colour assigned to each clutter class (by default, grey shading). Clutter file provides clutter code per bin. Bin size is defined by pixel size (P stated in metre). Pixel size must be the same in both directions. Abscissa and ordinate axes are respectively oriented in right and down directions. First point given in the file corresponds to the upper-left corner of the image. This point refers to the northwest point georeferenced by A9155

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 93

2.1 Geo databases

2.1.28 Morphostructure (2)


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

94

Besides the topo database the basic input for radio network planning Each propagation area has different obstacles like buildings, forest etc. Obstacles which have similar effects on propagation conditions are classified in morphoclasses Each morphoclass has a corresponding value for the correction gain The resolution of the morpho databases should be adapted to the propagation model Morpho correction factor for predictions:
0 dB (skyscapers") 30 dB (water")

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

Morphodatabases (Landuse/Clutter) are a special kind of geodatabases. The morphodatabase is beside the topodatabase the basic input for radio network planning. Each morphoclass has a corresponding value of propagation loss. Together with a topographical database it is possible to predict the radio wave propagation. Each propagation area has different obstacles like buildings, forest etc. Those obstacles, which have similar effects on propagation conditions are classified in morphoclasses. This resolution of the morphodatabases should be adapted to the empirical propagation model for macrocellular radio network planning and the necessary planning resolution. In most cases the resolution of the rasterdatabases for morphostructure is around 50 ...100 m. With those values an optimum between calculation time and the necessary resolution of the prediction is reached in most radio network planning projects. For microcellular radio network planning a buildingdatabase is needed with a higher resolution. Each morphoclass is corresponding with a morpho-correction factor. The propagation loss is between 30 dB ("skyscrapers") ... and around 0 dB ("open area") The morphocorrection factors are achieved by calibration measurements

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 94

2.1 Geo databases

2.1.29 Morphoclasses
RNE Fundamentals 1- -

95

Code 0 1

MorphoDescription structure not classified e.g. edge of a database skyscrapers / very high buildings ( >40m), very high density of buildings, buildings no vegetation on ground level e.g. cities like NewYork, Tokio etc. dense urban 4 or more storeys, areas within urban perimeters, inner city, very little vegetation, high density of buildings, most buildings are standing close together, small pedestrian zones and streets incl. medium 3 or 4 storeys, areas within urban perimeters, most buildings urban / mean are standing close together, less vegetation, middle density urban of buildings, small pedestrian zones and streets included lower urban / 2 or 3 storeys, middle density of buildings, suburban some vegetation, terraced houses with gardens residential 1-2 storeys, low density of buildings with gardens e.g. farmhouses, detached houses

industrial zone factory, warehouse, garage, shipyards / industrial

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 95

2.1 Geo databases

2.1.30 Morphoclasses (2)


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

96

Code 7

Morphostructure forest

Description all kinds of forest, parks, with high tree density

agriculture / rural

high vegetation, plants: 1... 3 m, high density of plants, e.g. crop fields, fruit plantation

low tree low vegetation, low height of plants, density / parks low density of plants, some kinds of parks, botanical garden water sea, rivers, all kind of fresh- and saltwater

10

11

open area

12 13

(optional) (optional)

no buildings, no vegetation e.g. desert, beach, part of an airport, big streets etc. huge parking areas, large defined by networkplanner if necessary defined by networkplanner if necessary

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 96

2.1 Geo databases

2.1.31Background data (streets, borders etc.)


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

97

All kinds of information data like streets, borders, coastlines etc. Necessary for orientation in plots of calculation results The background data are not needed for the calculation of the fieldstrength, power etc.

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

These data represent either polygons (regions...), or lines (roads, coastlines...) or points (towns...).

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 97

2.1 Geo databases

2.1.32 Orthophoto
RNE Fundamentals 1- -

98

Georeferenced Satellite Image Resolution: most 10 or 20 m Satellite: e.g. SPOT, Landsat

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

These geographic data regroup the road maps and the satellite images ; they are only used for display and provide information about the geographic environment. A9155 supports scanned image files with TIFF (1, 4, 8, 24-bits/pixel), BIL (1, 4, 8, 24-bits/pixel), PlaNET (1, 4, 8, 24-bits/pixel), BMP (1-24-bits/pixel) and Erdas Imagine (1, 4, 8, 24-bits/pixel) formats.

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 98

2.1 Geo databases

2.1.33 Scanned Maps


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

99

Mainly used as background data Not used for calculation but for localisation Has to be geocoded to put it into a GIS (Geographic Information System) e.g. a Radio Network Planning Tool

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 99

2.1 Geo databases

2.1.34 Buildings
RNE Fundamentals 1- -

100

Vectordata
Outlines of
single buildings building blocks

Building heights Material code


not: roof shape

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 100

2.1 Geo databases

2.1.35 Buildings (2)


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

101

Microcell radio network planning is mainly used in urban environment The prediction of mircowave propagation is calculated with a ray-tracing/launching model A lot of calculation steps are needed Optimum building database required (data reduction) to minimize the pre-calculation time

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 101

2.1 Geo databases

2.1.36 Traffic density


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

102

Advantageous in the interference calculation, thus for frequency assignment and in the calculation of average figures in network analysis Raster database of traffic density values (in Erlangs) of the whole planning area Resolution: 20...100 m

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 102

2.1 Geo databases

2.1.37 Converting one single point (1a)


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

103

Example Stuttgart (Example 1) Long/Lat (WGS84) => UTM (WGS84) Exercise: Convert following example with the program Geotrans:
Input: Longitude: 9 deg 11 min 7.5 sec Latitude: 48 deg 45 min 13.5 sec Datum WGE: World Geodetic System 1984; Projection: Geodetic Output: Easting: 513629 m Northing: 5400099 m Datum WGE: World Geodetic System 1984 Projection: Universersal Transverse Mercator (UTM) Zone: 32 ; Hemisphere: N (North) Values, which will calculated by program Preset of this values necessary

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 103

2.1 Geo databases

2.1.38 Converting one single point (1b)


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

104

Example Stuttgart (Example 1) Long/Lat (WGS84) => UTM (WGS84) GEOTRANS (Geographic Translator) is an application program which allows you to convert geographic coordinates easily among a wide variety of coordinate systems, map projections, and datums.
Source: http://164.214.2.59/GandG/geotrans/

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 104

2.1 Geo databases

2.1.39 Converting one single point (2a)


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

105

Example Stuttgart (Example 2) Long/Lat (WGS84) => UTM (ED50)


(ED50 = EUR-A = European Datum 1950)

Exercise: Convert following example with the program Geotrans:


Input: Longitude: 9 deg 11 min 7.5 sec Latitude: 48 deg 45 min 13.5 sec Datum WGE: World Geodetic System 1984; Projection: Geodetic Output: Easting: 513549 m Northing: 5403685 m Datum EUR-A: EUROPEAN 1950, Western Europe Projection: Universersal Transverse Mercator (UTM) Zone: 32 ; Hemisphere: N (North)

Values, which will calculated by program Preset of this values necessary

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 105

2.1 Geo databases

2.1.40 Converting one single point (2b)


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

106

Example Stuttgart (Example 2) Long/Lat (WGS84) => UTM (ED50)


(ED50 = EUR-A = European Datum 1950)

Diff. X (Ex.2 - Ex.1): 69 m Diff. Y (Ex.2 - Ex.1): 200 m


Difference because of different Geodetic Datums

Attention: For flat coordinates (e.g. UTM) as well as for geographic coordinates (Long/Lat) a reference called Geodetic Datum is necessary.

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 106

2.1 Geo databases

2.1.41 Converting a list of points (3a)


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

107

Example Stuttgart (Example 3 ) Long/Lat (WGS84) => UTM (WGS84) Input: text-file with the values (list) of the longitude and latitude of different points (How to create the inputfile see on page 3c) Output: Datum: WGE: World Geodetic System 1984 Preset of this Projection: Universal Transverse Mercator (UTM) values necessary Zone: 32

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 107

2.1 Geo databases

2.1.42 Converting a list of points (3b)


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

108

Example Stuttgart (Example 3 ) Long/Lat (WGS84) => UTM (WGS84)

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 108

2.1 Geo databases

2.1.43 Converting a list of points (3c)


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

109

Example Stuttgart (Example 3) Long/Lat (WGS84)=> UTM (WGS84)


Geotrans V2.2.3 Geotrans V2.2.3

Latitude Longitude
deg min sec deg min sec

Optional: different error-infos, U T M H em E as N depending on the input-data -Zo isph ting ( orthing ne ere x) (y) default: Unk=unknown

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 109

2.1 Geo databases

2.1.44 Provider for Geospatial data


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

110

Geodatasupplier BKS ComputaMaps Geoimage Infoterra Istar RMSI

Internet www.bks.co.uk www.computamaps.com www.geoimage.fr www.infoterra-global.com www.istar.fr www.rmsi.com

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 110

2.1 Geo databases

2.1.45 Links for more detailed infos


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

111

Maps Projection Overview


http://www.colorado.edu/geography/gcraft/notes/mapproj/mapproj.html http://www.ecu.edu/geog/ http://www.wikipedia.org/wiki/Map_projection

Coordinate Transformation (online)


http://jeeep.com/details/coord/ http://www.cellspark.com/UTM.html

Map Collection
http://www.lib.utexas.edu/maps/index.html

Finding out Latitude/Longitude of cities etc.


http://www.maporama.com

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 111

2 Coverage Planning

2.2 Antennas and Cables


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

112

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 112

2.2 Antennas and Cables

2.2.1.1 The Antenna System


RNE Fundamentals 1- Lightning rod

113

Antennas Power divider Cables (jumper) Feeder cables Connectors Clamps Lightning protection Wall glands Planning
Plugs 7/16 Sockets 7/16

Tx

Antennas

Rxdiv
Mounting clamp Jumper cable Feeder installation clamps

Rx
Mechanical antenna support structure Jumper cable Earthing kit

Earthing kit Feeder cable Wall gland Grounding Jumper cables

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 113

2.2 Antennas and Cables

2.2.1.2 Antenna Theory


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

114

50 is the impedance of the cable 377 is the impedance of the air Antennas adapt the different impedances They convert guided waves, into free-space waves (Hertzian waves) and/or vice versa

Z =50

Z =377

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

It happens that the coulomb field and the induction field fall off much more rapidly than the radiation field with increasing distance from the antenna. At distances greater than a few wavelengths from the antenna, in what is called the antenna's far field, the electric field is essentially pure radiation. Closer to the antenna, we have the near field, which is a mixture of the radiation, induction and coulomb fields.

The coulomb field at an instant in time around a half-wave resonant dipole A half-cycle later, the polarity, and all the arrows, will be reversed. The spacing between the field lines indicates field strength.

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 114

2.2 Antennas and Cables

2.2.1.3 Antenna Data


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

115

The antenna parameters which are of interest for the radio network engineering are the following: w Antenna directivity, efficiency, gain w Polarization, near field and far field
Specification due to certain wave polarization (linear/elliptic, cross-polarization)

w Half power beam width (HPBW)


Related to polarization of electrical field Vertical and Horizontal HPBW

w Antenna pattern, side lobes, null directions


Yields the spatial radiation characteristics of the antenna

w Front-to-back ratio
Important for interference considerations

w Voltage standing wave ratio (VSWR) w Bandwidth

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

In electrodynamics, polarization (also spelled polarisation) is the property of electromagnetic waves, such as light, that describes the direction of their transverse electric field. More generally, the polarization of a transverse wave describes the direction of oscillation in the plane perpendicular to the direction of travel. Longitudinal waves such as sound waves do not exhibit polarization, because for these waves the direction of oscillation is along the direction of travel.

Linear

Circular
3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 115

Elliptical

2.2 Antennas and Cables

2.2.1.4 Antenna Pattern and HPBW


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

116

horizontal

0 dB -3 dB

vertical

0 dB -3 dB

-10 dB

-10 dB

sidelobe

HPBW

main beam null direction

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

The antenna radiation pattern also named antenna diagram, describes the relative strength of the radiated field in various directions from the antenna, at a constant distance. The radiation pattern is a reception pattern as well, since it also describes the receiving properties of the antenna. The radiation pattern is threedimensional, but usually as shown in Figure 4, the measured radiation patterns are a two dimensional slice of the three-dimensional pattern, in the horizontal or vertical planes. This pattern depends on the antenna geometry and the current distribution in its elements. It is possible to compose, with a certain degree of freedom, arbitrary antenna diagrams by arranging antenna elements, e.g. dipoles, in groups, e.g. in a grid arrangement. As shown in Figure, each antenna pattern consists of a couple of beams or lobes. One distinguishes the main beam, pointing in the direction where the maximum power is radiated, and the side lobes, which are local maxima in the antenna diagram. The side lobes must sometimes be treated with special care, as they could radiate too much power towards unplanned directions of the cell. This may lead to unexpected interference with other cells! The antenna has directions where it isn't nearly radiating. These directions are called null directions. They may cause coverage problems. Based on the radiation pattern, the radio mobiles antennas are categorized in the following types: Omni-directional antennas that provides a 360 degree horizontal radiation pattern. Omni antennas are typically used when continuous coverage around the site is needed and the offered traffic is low. Directional antennas that provide a stronger radiation pattern in a specific direction by focusing the radiation energy. For instance the radiation pattern shown in Figure, belongs to a directive antenna. The sector or panel antennas are directional antennas and they are built based on the array antennas principle. Array antennas consist of a number of dipole antennas arranged in a geometrical manner to create a directional receiving or transmission pattern. The panel antennas are used on sectorized sites in order to focus the coverage on special area of interest.

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 116

2.2 Antennas and Cables

2.2.1.5 EIRP
RNE Fundamentals 1- -

117

Isotropic radiated Power Pt

Effective isotropic radiated power: EIRP = Pt+Gain = 56 dBm

V1 V2 = V1
Gain = 11dBi

Pt = 45 dBm

radiated power

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

Known the antenna gain and the power fed into antenna, an important link budget parameter, the Effective Isotropic Radiated (EIRP) can be calculated. The EIRP represents the total power radiated by the antenna Effective Isotropic Radiated Power

EIRP = Pin + G

EIRP Pin G

Effective Isotropic Radiated Power (in main beam direction) in [dBm]; power fed into the antenna, [dBm]; antenna gain, [dBi];

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 117

2.2 Antennas and Cables

2.2.1.6 Linear Antennas


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

118

For the link between base station and mobile station, mostly linear antennas are used:
Monopole antennas
MS antennas, car roof antennas

Dipole antennas
Used for array antennas at base stations for increasing the directivity of RX and TX antennas

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 118

2.2 Antennas and Cables

2.2.1.7 Monopole Antenna Pattern


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

119

Influence of antenna length on the antenna pattern

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 119

2.2 Antennas and Cables

2.2.1.8 Panel Antenna with Dipole Array


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

120

Many dipoles are arranged in a grid layout Nearly arbitrary antenna patterns may be designed
Feeding of the dipoles with weighted and phase-shifted signals Coupling of all dipole elements

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 120

2.2 Antennas and Cables

2.2.1.9 Dipole Arrangement


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

121

w Dipole arrangement
Weighted and phase shifted signals
Typical flat panel antenna

Dipole element

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 121

2.2 Antennas and Cables

2.2.1.10 Omni Antenna


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

122

Antenna with vertical HPBW for omni sites


Large area coverage

Advantages
Continuous coverage around the site Simple antenna mounting Ideal for homogeneous terrain

Drawbacks
No mechanical tilt possible Clearance of antenna required

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 122

2 Coverage Planning

2.2.2 Antenna Parameters


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

123

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 123

2.2.2 Antennas Parameters

2.2.2.1 X 65 T6 900MHz 2.5m


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

124

Rural road coverage with mechanical uptilt Antenna


RFS Panel Dual Polarized Antenna 872-960 MHz APX906516-T6 Series

Electrical specification
Gain in dBi: 17.1 Polarization: +/-45 HBW: 65 VBW: 6.5 Electrical downtilt: 6

Mechanical specification
Dimensions HxWxD in mm: 2475 x 306 x 120 Weight in kg: 16.6
Horizontal Pattern
Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 124

2.2.2 Antennas Parameters

2.2.2.2 X 65 T6 900MHz 1.9m


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

125

Dense urban area Antenna


RFS Panel Dual Polarized Antenna 872-960 MHz APX906515-T6 Series

Electrical specification
Gain in dBi: 16.5 Polarization: +/-45 HBW: 65 VBW: 9 Electrical downtilt: 6

Mechanical specification
Dimensions HxWxD in mm: 1890 x 306 x 120 Weight in kg: 16.6
Vertical Pattern
Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 125

2.2.2 Antennas Parameters

2.2.2.3 X 90 T2 900MHz 2.5m


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

126

Rural area with mechanical uptilt Antenna


RFS Panel Dual Polarized Antenna 872-960 MHz APX909014-T6 Series

Electrical specification
Gain in dBi: 15.9 Polarization: +/-45 HPBW: 90 VBW: 7 Electrical downtilt: 6

Mechanical specification
Dimensions HxWxD in mm: 2475 x 306 x 120 Weight in kg: 15.5
Vertical Pattern
Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 126

2.2.2 Antennas Parameters

2.2.2.4 V 65 T0 900MHz 2.0m


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

127

Highway Antenna
RFS CELLite Panel Vertical Polarized Antenna 872-960 MHz AP906516-T0 Series

Electrical specification
Gain in dBi: 17.5 Polarization: Vertical HBW: 65 VBW: 8.5 Electrical downtilt: 0

Mechanical specification
Dimensions HxWxD in mm: 1977 x 265 x 130 Weight in kg: 10.9
Vertical Pattern
Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 127

2.2.2 Antennas Parameters

2.2.2.5 V 90 T0 900MHz 2.0m


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

128

Rural Area Antenna


RFS CELLite Panel Vertical Polarized Antenna 872-960 MHz AP909014-T0 Series

Electrical specification
Gain in dBi: 16.0 Polarization: Vertical HBW: 65 VBW: 8.5 Electrical downtilt: 0

Mechanical specification
Dimensions HxWxD in mm: 1977 x 265 x 130 Weight in kg: 9.5
Vertical Pattern
Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 128

2.2.2 Antennas Parameters

2.2.2.4 X 65 T6 1800MHz 1.3m


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

129

Dense urban area Antenna


RFS Panel Dual Polarized Antenna 1710-1880 MHz APX186515-T6 Series

Electrical specification
Gain in dBi: 17.5 Polarization: +/-45 HBW: 65 VBW: 7 Electrical downtilt: 6

Mechanical specification
Dimensions HxWxD in mm: 1310 x 198 x 50 Weight in kg: 5.6
Vertical Pattern
Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 129

2.2.2 Antennas Parameters

2.2.2.5 X 65 T2 1800MHz 1.3m


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

130

Dense urban area Antenna


RFS Panel Dual Polarized Antenna 1710-1880 MHz APX186515-T2 Series

Electrical specification
Gain in dBi: 17.5 Polarization: +/-45 HBW: 65 VBW: 7 Electrical downtilt: 2

Mechanical specification
Dimensions HxWxD in mm: 1310 x 198 x 50 Weight in kg: 5.6
Vertical Pattern
Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 130

2.2.2 Antennas Parameters

2.2.2.6 X 65 T2 1800MHz 1.9m


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

131

Highway Antenna
RFS Panel Dual Polarized Antenna 1710-1880 MHz APX186516-T2 Series

Electrical specification
Gain in dBi: 18.3 Polarization: +/-45 HBW: 65 VBW: 4.5 Electrical downtilt: 2

Mechanical specification
Dimensions HxWxD in mm: 1855 x 198 x 50 Weight in kg: 8.6
Vertical Pattern
Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 131

2.2.2 Antennas Parameters

2.2.2.7 V 65 T2 1800MHz 1.3m


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

132

Highway Antenna
RFS CELLite Panel Vertical Polarized Antenna 1710-1880 MHz AP186516-T2 Series

Electrical specification
Gain in dBi: 17.0 Polarization: Vertical HBW: 65 VBW: 7.5 Electrical downtilt: 2

Mechanical specification
Dimensions HxWxD in mm: 1310 x 198 x 50 Weight in kg: 4.7
Horizontal Pattern
Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 132

2.2.2 Antennas Parameters

2.2.2.8 V 90 T2 1800MHz 1.9m


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

133

Highway Antenna
RFS CELLite Panel Vertical Polarized Antenna 1710-1880 MHz AP189016-T2 Series

Electrical specification
Gain in dBi: 17.0 Polarization: Vertical HBW: 90 VBW: 5.5 Electrical downtilt: 2

Mechanical specification
Dimensions HxWxD in mm: 1855 x 198 x 50 Weight in kg: 6.0
Vertical Pattern
Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 133

2 Coverage Planning

2.2.3 Cable Parameters


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

134

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 134

2.2.3 Cable Parameters

2.2.3.1 7/8" CELLFLEX Low-Loss Coaxial Cable


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

135

Feeder Cable
7/8" CELLFLEX Low-Loss FoamDielectric Coaxial Cable LCF78-50J Standard LCF78-50JFN Flame Retardant
Installation temperature >-25C

Mechanical specification
Cable weight kg\m: 0.53 Minimum bending radius
Single bend in mm: 120 Repeated bends in mm: 250

Electrical specification 900MHz


Attenuation: 3.87dB/100m Average power in kW: 2.45

Bending moment in Nm: 13.0 Recommended clamp spacing: 0.8m

Electrical specification 1800MHz


Attenuation: 5.73dB/100m Average power in kW: 1.79

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 135

2.2.3 Cable Parameters

2.2.3.2 1-1/4" CELLFLEX Coaxial Cable


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

136

Feeder Cable
1-1/4" CELLFLEX Low-Loss FoamDielectric Coaxial Cable LCF114-50J Standard LCF114-50JFN Flame Retardant
Installation temperature >-25C

Mechanical specification
Cable weight kg\m: 0.86 Minimum bending radius
Single bend in mm: 200 Repeated bends in mm: 380

Electrical specification 900MHz


Attenuation: 3.06dB/100m Average power in kW: 3.56

Bending moment in Nm: 38.0 Recommended clamp spacing: 1.0m

Electrical specification 1800MHz


Attenuation: 4.61dB/100m Average power in kW: 2.36

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 136

2.2.3 Cable Parameters

2.2.3.3 1-5/8" CELLFLEX Coaxial Cable


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

137

Feeder Cable
1-5/8" CELLFLEX Low-Loss FoamDielectric Coaxial Cable LCF158-50J Standard LCF158-50JFN Flame Retardant
Installation temperature >-25C

Mechanical specification
Cable weight kg\m: 1.26 Minimum bending radius
Single bend in mm: 200 Repeated bends in mm: 508

Electrical specification 900MHz


Attenuation: 2.34dB/100m Average power in kW: 4.97

Bending moment in Nm: 46.0 Recommended clamp spacing: 1.2m

Electrical specification 1800MHz


Attenuation: 3.57dB/100m Average power in kW: 3.26

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 137

2.2.3 Cable Parameters

2.2.3.4 1/2" CELLFLEX Jumper Cable


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

138

CELLFLEX LCF12-50J Jumpers


Feeder Cable
LCF12-50J CELLFLEX Low-Loss FoamDielectric Coaxial Cable

Electrical specification 900MHz


Attenuation: 0.068db/m Total losses with connectors are 0.108dB, 0.176dB and 0.244dB

Connectors
7/16 DIN male/female N male/female Right angle

Electrical specification 1800MHz


Attenuation: 0.099dB/m Total losses with connectors are 0.139dB, 0.238dB and 0.337dB

Molded version available in 1m, 2m, 3m

Mechanical specification
Minimum bending radius
Repeated bends in mm: 125

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 138

2 Coverage Planning

2.3 Radio Propagation


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

139

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 139

2.3 Radio Propagation

2.3.1 Propagation effects


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

140

Free space loss Fresnel ellipsoid Reflection, Refraction, Scattering


in the atmosphere at a boundary to another material

Diffraction
at small obstacles over round earth

Attenuation
Rain attenuation Gas absorption

Fading

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 140

2.3.1 Propagation effects

2.3.1.1 Reflection
RNE Fundamentals 1- -

141

Pr = Rh/v P0 Rh/v = f(, , , h)

Rh Rv h

horizontal reflection factor vertical reflection factor angle of incidence permittivity conductivity surface roughness
Pr

P0

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 141

2.3.1 Propagation effects

2.3.1.2 Refraction
RNE Fundamentals 1- -

142

Considered via an effective earth radius factor k


k = 4/3 k = k=1 k = 2/3

radio path

k = 2/3
k=1 k = 4/3

k=

true earth

Radio path plotted as a straight line by changing the earth's radius

Ray paths with different k over true earth

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 142

2.3.1 Propagation effects

2.3.1.3 Diffraction
RNE Fundamentals 1 - - 143

Occurs at objects which sizes are in the order of the wavelength Radio waves are bent or curved around objects
Bending angle increases if object thickness is smaller compared to Influence of the object causes an attenuation: diffraction loss

radio obstacle shadow zone diffracted radio

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 143

2.3.1 Propagation effects

2.3.1.4 Fading
RNE Fundamentals 1- -

144

Caused by delay spread of original signal


Multi path propagation Time-dependent variations in heterogeneity of environment Movement of receiver

Short-term fading, fast fading


This fading is characterised by phase summation and cancellation of signal components, which travel on multiple paths. The variation is in the order of the considered wavelength. Their statistical behaviour is described by the Rayleigh distribution (for nonLOS signals) and the Rice distribution (for LOS signals), respectively. In GSM, it is already considered by the sensitivity values, which take the error correction capability into account.

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 144

2.3.1 Propagation effects

2.3.1.5 Fading types


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

145

Mid-term fading, lognormal fading


Mid-term field strength variations caused by objects in the size of 10...100m (cars, trees, buildings). These variations are lognormal distributed.

Long-term fading, slow fading


Long-term variations caused by large objects like large buildings, forests, hills, earth curvature (> 100m). Like the mid-term field strength variations, these variations are lognormal distributed.

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 145

2.3.1 Propagation effects

2.3.1.6 Signal Variation due to Fading


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

146

0 Lognormal fading -10 Raleygh fading

-20 Received Power [dBm]

-30

-40

-50

Fading hole
-60

-70 10.6 13.2 15.9 18.5 21.1 23.7 26.3 29.0 31.6 34.2 36.8 39.4 42.1 44.7 47.3 49.9 0.1 2.8 5.4 8.0

Distance [m]

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

Raylaight/Rician Fading: Fast Fading. Rayleight : Statistical behaviour of Fast Fading signals for NON LOS-Signals. Lognormal Fading

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 146

2.3.1 Propagation effects

2.3.1.7 Lognormal Fading


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

147

Lognormal fading (typical 20 dB loss by entering a village)

Fading hole Lognormal fading (entering a tunnel)

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 147

2 Coverage Planning

2.4 Path Loss Prediction


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

148

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 148

2.4 Path Loss Prediction

2.4.1 Free Space Loss


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

149

The simplest form of wave propagation is the free-space propagation The according path loss can be calculated with the following formula Path Loss in Free Space Propagation
L free space loss d distance between transmitter and receiver antenna f operating frequency

Lfreespace
Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

d f = 32.4 + 20 log + 20 log km MHz


All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 149

2.4 Path Loss Prediction

2.4.2 Fresnel Ellipsoid


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

150

The free space loss formula can only be applied if the direct line-of-sight (LOS) between transmitter and receiver is not obstructed This is the case, if a specific region around the LOS is cleared from any obstacles The region is called Fresnel ellipsoid

Transmitter LOS Receiver

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 150

2.4 Path Loss Prediction

2.4.3 Fresnel Ellipsoid


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

151

d1 d2 r= d1 + d2
Fresnel zone Transmitter LOS

The Fresnel ellipsoid is the set of all points around the LOS where the total length of the connecting lines to the transmitter and the receiver is longer than the LOS length by exactly half a wavelength It can be shown that this region is carrying the main power flow from transmitter to receiver

Receiver

LOS + /2

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 151

2.4 Path Loss Prediction

2.4.4 Knife Edge Diffraction


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

152

path of diffracted wave

BTS

h0 line of sight

MS
d2

1st Fresnel zone d1

h0 = height of obstacle over line of sight d1, d2 = distance of obstacle from BTS and MS

replaced obstacle (knife edge) h0 r d1 d2

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

Knife edge diffraction In case of an obstruction of the LOS path, the free-space formula with an additional correction term can be used if the obstacle is small compared to the distance from transmitter to receiver. Based on the assumption that this obstacle can be replaced by an ideal conducting half-plane which extends to infinity in the direction perpendicular to the propagation path and which is of infinitesimal thickness (knife-edge), this situation refers to a field theory problem which can be solved in a deterministic way. In the case that this knife-edge obstacle type enters the Fresnel region, diffraction occurs (similar to the diffraction known from optics) and introduces some additional diffraction loss compared to the free-space propagation. The diffraction loss can be described by

Ldiff = F (v)

where v =

h0 d + d2 2 = h0 1 r d1 d 2

with h0 the height of the obstacle above the LOS. v is a parameter which represents the number of cleared Fresnel ellipsoids. The function F(v) is shown in . One can see that the diffraction loss is 6dB if the obstacle is just touching the LOS.

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 152

2.4 Path Loss Prediction

2.4.5 Knife Edge Diffraction Function


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

153

Knife-edge diffraction function


35 30 25 F(v) [dB] 20 15 10 5 0 -5 -9 -8 -7 -6 -5 -4 -3 -2 -1 0 1 2 3 Clearance of Fresnel ellipsoid (v)

Additional diffraction loss F(v) v: clearance parameter, v=-h0/r Note: h0 = 0 v =0 L = 6 dB

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

h0

V=0:1=0

LOS

h0 LOS r

d1

d2

The function F(v) is shown on the top . One can see that the diffraction loss is 6dB if the obstacle is just touching the LOS. For v>1, some oscillation is noted, which appears due to the fact that the obstacle moves over several Fresnel regions where the phase of the transmitted signal is alternating between +180 and -180 phase shift. In reality, the conductivity of the obstacles material is not ideal, and the oscillations appears smoothed to an average value.

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 153

2.4 Path Loss Prediction

2.4.6 "Final Solution" for Wave Propagation Calculations?


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

154

Exact field solution requires too much computer resources!


Too much details required for input Exact calculation too time-consuming Field strength prediction rather than calculation

Requirements for field strength prediction models


Reasonable amount of input data Fast (it is very important to see the impact of changes in the network layout immediately) Accurate (results influence the hardware cost directly) Tradeoff required (accurate results within a suitable time) Parameter tuning according to real measurements should be possible

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 154

2.4 Path Loss Prediction

2.4.7 CCIR Recommendation


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

155

The CCIR Recommendations provide various propagation curves


Based on Okumura (1968) Example (CCIR Report 567-3): Median field strength in urban area Frequency = 900 MHz hMS = 1.5 m Dashed line: free space

How to use this experience in field strength prediction models?

Model which fits the curves in certain ranges Hata's model


was modified later by the European Cooperation in Science and Technology (COST): COST 231 Hata/Okumura

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 155

2.4 Path Loss Prediction

2.4.8 Mobile Radio Propagation


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

156

d
L ~ d2

Free-space propagation (Fresnel zone not obstructed)

Fresnel zone heavily obstructed near the mobile station L ~ d3.7

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 156

2.4 Path Loss Prediction

2.4.9 Terrain Modeling


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

157

Topography
Effective antenna height Knife edge diffraction
single obstacles multiple obstacles

Surface shape/Morpho-structure
Correction factors for Hata-Okumura formula

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 157

2.4 Path Loss Prediction

2.4.10 Effect of Morphostructure on Propagation Loss


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

158

Open area

Urban area

Open area

Fieldstrength

open area urban area Distance

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 158

2.4 Path Loss Prediction

2.4.11 Okumura-Hata for GSM 900


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

159

Path loss (Lu) is calculated (in dB) as follows: Lu= A1 + A2 log(f) + A3 log(hBTS) + (B1 + B2log(hBTS)) log d The parameters A1, A2, A3, B1 and B2 can be user-defined. Default values are proposed in the table below:
Parameters Okumura-Hata f< 1500 MHz Cost-Hata F>1500 MHz

A1 A2 A3 B1 B2

69.55 26.16 -13.82 44.90 -6.55

46.30 33.90 -13.82 44.90 -6.55

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

Hata formula empirically describes the path loss as a function of frequency, receiver-transmitter distance and antenna heights for an urban environment. This formula is valid for flat, urban environments and 1.5 metre mobile antenna height.

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 159

2.4 Path Loss Prediction

2.4.12 CORRECTIONS TO THE HATA FORMULA


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

160

As described above, the Hata formula is valid for urban environment and a receiver antenna height of 1.5m. For other environments and mobile antenna heights, corrective formulas must be applied.
Lmodel1=Lu-a(hMS) for large city and urban environments Lmodel1=Lu-a(hMS) -2log (f/28) -5.4 for suburban area Lmodel1=Lu -a(hMS) - 4.78log (f)+ 18.33 log(f) 40.94 for rural area a(hMS) is a correction factor to take into account a receiver antenna height different from 1.5m.
Environments Rural/Small city Large city A(hMS) (1.1log(f) 0.7)hMS (1.56log(f) -0.8) 3.2log (11.75hMS) 4.97

Note: When receiver antenna height equals 1.5m, a(hMS) is close to 0 dB regardless of frequency.

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 160

2.4 Path Loss Prediction

2.4.13 Hata-Okumura for GSM 900


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

161

LossHata = 69.55 + 26.16 log (f) - 13.82 log (hBTS) - a(hMS) +(44.9 - 6.55 log (hBTS)) log (d) - Lmorpho
a (hMS) = (1.1 log (f) - 0.7) hMS - (1.56 log (f) - 0.8)

Formula valid for frequency range: 1501000 MHz

2.4 Path Loss Prediction 2.4 Path Loss Prediction

Lmorpho [dB] f [MHz] hBTS [m] hMS [m] d [km]

Morpho/surface shape-Correction factor 0 dB: Skyscrapers->27 dB: open area Frequency (150 - 1000 MHz) Height of BTS (30 - 200 m) Height of Mobile (1 - 10m) Distance between BTS and MS (1 - 20 km) Power law exponent shown colored
All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 161

2.4 Path Loss Prediction

2.4.14 COST 231 Hata-Okumura GSM 1800


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

162

LossHata = 46.3 + 33.9 log (f) - 13.82 log (hBTS) - a(hMS) +(44.9 - 6.55 log (hBTS)) log (d) - Lmorpho
a (hMS) = (1.1 log (f) - 0.7) hMS - (1.56 log (f) -0.8)

Formula is valid for frequency range: 1500...2000 MHz Hatas model is extended for GSM 1800
Modification of original formula to the new frequency range

For cells with small ranges the COST 231 Walfish-Ikegami model is more precisely

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 162

2.4 Path Loss Prediction

2.4.15 Alcatel Propagation Model (Standard Propagation Model)


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

163

Lmodel = K1 + K 2 log(d ) + K 3 log(HTxeff ) + K 4 Diffraction loss + K 5 log(d ) log(HTxeff ) + K 6 (H Rxeff ) + K clutter f (clutter )
With: K1: constant offset (dB). K2: multiplying factor for log(d). d: distance between the receiver and the transmitter (m). K3: multiplying factor for log(HTxeff). HTxeff: effective height of the transmitter antenna (m). K4: multiplying factor for diffraction calculation. K4 has to be a positive number. Diffraction loss: loss due to diffraction over an obstructed path (dB). K5: multiplying factor for log(HTxeff)log(d). K6: multiplying factor for . : effective mobile antenna height (m). Kclutter: multiplying factor for f(clutter). f(clutter): average of weighted losses due to clutter.

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 163

2.4 Path Loss Prediction

2.4.16 Alcatel Propagation Model


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

164

Using of effective antenna height in the Hata-Okumura formula:

hRx eff = f(, d, hBTS, hMS)

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 164

2.4 Path Loss Prediction

2.4.17 Exercise Path Loss


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

165

Scenario
Height BTS = 40m Height MS = 1.5m D (BTS to MS) = 2000m

1. Calculate free space loss for


A.) f=900MHz B.) f=1800MHz

2. Calculate the path loss for f = 900MHz


A.) Morpho class skyscraper B.) Morpho class open area

3. Calculate the path loss for f = 1800MHz


A.) Morpho class skyscraper B.) Morpho class open area

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

Morpho correction factors: -Skyscraper: 0dB; -Open area: 27dB 1. Calculate free space loss for A.) f=900MHz: 97.6dB B.) f=1800MHz: 103.6dB 2. Calculate the path loss for f = 900MHz A.) Morpho class skyscraper: 135dB B.) Morpho class open area: 108dB 3. Calculate the path loss for f = 1800MHz A.) Morpho class skyscraper: 144.8dB B.) Morpho class open area: 117.8dB

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 165

2 Coverage Planning

2.5 Link Budget Calculation


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

166

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 166

2.5 Link Budget Calculation

2.5.1 Maximum Propagation Loss (Downlink)


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

167

Effective Isotropic Radiated Power EIRPBTS = 59.5 dBm BTS Antenna Gain GantBS = 16.5 dBi

Propagation Loss Lprop

Minimum Received Power PRX,min,MS = -102 dBm MS Antenna Gain GantMS = 2 dBi

Feeder Cable Loss Lcable = 3 dB Output Power at antenna connector 46.0 dBm ALCATEL EvoliumTM

Internal Losses Lint = 2 dB MS RX Sensitivity -102 dBm

Maximum allowed downlink propagation loss:

LMAPL = EIRPBTS - PRX,min,MS = 161.5 dB

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

Exercice:
Calculate the MAPL for this Example: MAPL=

Add. Losses: Anx = Anc = ANy = 1.8 dB 5.1 dB 3.5 dB ---------Give the result for different using : 1. With Combiner 2. Without combiner

Pathloss without ANy = 153.6 dB

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 167

2.5 Link Budget Calculation

2.5.2 Maximum Propagation Loss (Uplink)


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

168

Minimum Received Power PRX,min,BTS = -124.5 dBm BTS Antenna Gain GantBS = 16.5 dBi

Propagation Loss Lprop

EIRPMS = 33 dBm MS Antenna Gain GantMS = 2 dBi

Feeder Cable Loss Lcable = 3 dB Receiving sensitivity at ant. conn. -111 dBm ALCATEL EvoliumTM

Internal Losses Lint = 2 dB MS TX Power 33 dBm

Max. allowed uplink propagation loss: With antenna diversity gain of 3dB: With TMA compensating cable loss:

Lprop,max = EIRPMS - PRX,min,BTS = 157.5 dB Lprop,max,AD = EIRPMS - PRX,min,BTS + GAD = 160.5 dB Lprop,max,AD,TMA = EIRPMS - PRX,min,BTS + GAD + GTMA = 163.5 dB

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

AD

= Antenna Diversity

~3dB Gain

TMA = Tower Mounted Amplifier ~3-4 dB Gain

Exercice:
Calculate the MAPL for these Examples: MAPL(AD)= MAPL(AD+TMA) =

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 168

2.5 Link Budget Calculation

2.5.3 GSM900/1800 Link Budget


RNE Fundamentals Uplink RX Sensitivity Antenna Diversity Gain External Device Losses Feeder Loss RX Parameters Jumpers and Connectors Losses TMA Contribution Antenna Gain Isotropic Power TX Output Power External Device Losses Feeder Loss Jumpers and Connectors Losses TX Parameters TMA Insertion Loss Antenna Gain Slant Polarization Loss EIRP Slow Fading Margin Interference Margin Margins Body Loss Penetration Margin (indoor/in-car) Total Margins Maximum Allowable Path Loss EIRPUL = PTX_MS LSFM LIF LBODY LPEN M = LSFM + LIF + LBODY + LPEN MAPLUL = EIRPUL - PISO_UL M PRX_BTS GAD LEXT LFEEDER LJC GTMA GANT PISO_UL = PRX_BTS - GAD + LEXT + LFEEDER+LJC - GTMA- GANT PTX_MS PISO_DL = PRX_MS PTX_BTS LEXT LFEEDER LJC LTMA GANT LSLANT EIRPDL = PTX_BTS - LEXT - LFEEDER - LJC - LTMA + GANT - LSLANT LSFM LIF LBODY LPEN M = LSFM + LIF + LBODY + LPEN MAPLDL = EIRPDL - PISO_DL - M Downlink PRX_MS

1- -

169

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

The GSM link budget components are described as follows: TX Output Power RX Sensitivity Antenna Gain Antenna Diversity Gain UL/DL: measured in dBm, represent the BTS and the MS output power. UL/DL: measured in dBm, express the BTS and MS receiver sensitivity. DL only: the BTS antenna gain, measured in dBi. The MS antenna gain is normally assumed to be 0dBi. UL only: the gain measured in dB that is caused by the diversity reception of the radio signal in uplink. Information concerning the antenna diversity gain used for link budget calculation is given in; UL only: the Tower Mounted Amplifiers contribution in UL. It is expressed in dB. DL only: the loss caused in DL path due to internal TMA filters and duplexers. It is a TMA catalog parameter and it is expressed in dB. UL/DL: the loss due to the usage of external components such external diplexers, splitters, etc. It is measured in dB, and can be deduced from respective data sheets. UL/DL: the loss due to feeder cable, measured in dB. UL/DL: the loss due to the usage of jumpers and connectors, measured in dB.

TMA Contribution TMA Insertion Loss External Device Loss

Feeder Loss Jumper and Connector Loss

See also next page

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 169

RNE Fundamentals -

1- -

170

Slant Polarization Loss

DL only: the polarization mismatch loss and represents a signal loss due to different polarization at the transmitting and receiving end, e.g. the usage of BTS cross polarized antenna at 45. It is not applicable for MS. As a rule of thumb, 0 dB is considered for slant polarization loss in case of cross-polar antenna usage within the urban and sub-urban areas. Contrary, 1.5 to 3 dB is recommended in case of rural and open areas. For deeper aspects please.

EIRP Isotropic Power

UL/DL: the Effective Isotropic Radiated Power, measured in dBm. UL/DL: the minimum power, measured in dB, required to maintain a certain level of service, at the receiver antenna. The calculation method inside the link budget is described in page 169 UL/DL: Maximum allowable path loss. The weaker value is considered within the network design process. Explanation on computation is shown in page 169 UL/DL: called also log-normal margin, measured in dB, added to the path loss calculation in order to increase the coverage probability at the cell border to a certain value. UL/DL: a margin measured in dB, added to the link budget in order to compensate the signal degradation due to interference. A value of 3 dB is typical considered. More information on interference margin can be found in GSM rec. 03.30. All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel UL/DL: a margin measured in dB, included to reflect the loss especially experienced if handheld mobiles are used. It is occurring due to partial field absorption in the human body. Typical values are 3 dB and 4 dB. Further details are specified in GSM rec. 03.30. UL/DL: the penetration margin is measured in dB and is given on the service class basis. Consequently, the penetration margin can be an in-car or an indoor margin: In-car margin measured in dB, added due to MS usage in a car. Typically a loss of 6 to 8 dB is assumed. Indoor margin measured in dB, added due to MS usage in indoor environment at ground floor level. Usually, indoor is referred to the first wall and no statement is given for deep indoor coverage. Its range varies from 10 to 18 dB. Deep indoor margin measured in dB, included due to MS usage deep inside the buildings. Its range varies from 13 to 28 dB.

MAPL

Slow Fading Margin

Interference Margin

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

Body Loss Margin

Penetration Margin

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 170

2.5 Link Budget Calculation

2.5.3 GSM900/1800 Link Budget


RNE Fundamentals 1- MS to BS BS to MS Downlink dBm dB dBm dB dB dBi dBm 11,0 46,0 dBi dBm 41,0 3,0 38,0 3,0 dBm dB dBm dB

171

GSM900 Link Budget (Example)

TX Internal Power Comb+Filter Loss, Tol. Output Power Cable,Connectors Loss Body/Indoor Loss Antenna Gain EIRP

Uplink 33,0 0,0 33,0 2,0 4,0 2,0 29,0

RX Rec. Sensitivity Body/Indoor Loss Cables, Connectors Loss Antenna Gain Diversity Gain Interferer Margin Lognormal Margin 50% 90,9% Degradation (no FH) Antenna Pre-Ampl. Isotr. Rec. Power:

Uplink -104,0 3,0 11,0 3,0 3,0 8,0 0,0 0,0 -104,0 dBm dB dBi dB dB dB dB dB dBm

Downlink -102,0 4,0 2,0 2,0 3,0 8,0 0,0 -87,0 dBm dB dB dBi dB dB dB dBm

Max. Pathloss

133,0

dB

133,0

dB

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 171

2.5 Link Budget Calculation

2.5.4 GSM1800 Link Budget


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

172

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

TX Internal Power Comb+Filter Loss Output Power Cable+Conn Loss Body/Indoor Loss Antenna Gain EIRP RX Rec. Sensitivity Body/Indoor Loss Cables, Con. Loss Antenna Gain Diversity Gain Interferer Margin Lognormal Margin Isotr. Rec. Power Max. Pathloss

Uplink 33 dBm - 0 dBm 33 dBm - 2 dB - 4 dB + 2 dBi 29.0 dBm Uplink - 109 dBm + + + 3 dB 11 dBi 3 dBi 3 dB 8 dB

Downlink 45.4 dBm - 5.3 dBm 40.1 dBm - 3 dBm + 11 dBi 48.1 dBm Downlink - 102 dBm + 4 dB + 2 dB - 2 dBi + 3 dB + 8 dB - 87 dBm 135.1 dB

- 109 dB 138 dB

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 172

2.5 Link Budget Calculation

2.5.5 Additional Losses Overview


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

173

Loss type Indoor loss Incar loss Body loss Interferer margin Lognormal margin

Reason Electrical properties of wall material Brass influencing radio waves Absorption of radio waves by the human body Both signal-to-noise ratio and C/I low Receiving the minimum field strength with a higher probability

Value 20dB (3...30dB) 7dB (4...10dB) 3dB (0...8dB) 3 dB According to probability

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 173

2 Coverage Planning

2.6 Coverage Probability


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

174

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 174

2.6 Coverage Probability

2.6.1 Indoor propagation aspects


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

175

Penetration Loss Multiple Refraction Multiple Reflection Exact modeling of indoor environment not possible Practical solution: empirical model!

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 175

2.6 Coverage Probability

2.6.2 Indoor propagation: empirical model


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

176

Additional Loss in [dB] relative to loss at vertical incidence


35

Power relative to power at d=0

Additional attenuation in dB

30 25 20 15 10 5 0 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72 78 84

Angle of incidence in degree

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

90

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 176

2.6 Coverage Probability

2.6.3 Indoor Penetration


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

177

Depending on environment Line-of-sight to antenna? Interior unknown


general assumptions

-0.3 dB / floor (11th ... 100th floor)

Incident wave

Lindoor = 3 ... 15 dB

-2.7 dB / floor (1st ... 10th floor)

Incident wave

Lindoor = 7 ... 18 dB (ground floor)

Lindoor = 13 ... 25 dB

Lindoor = 17 ... 28 dB Lindoor = dB (deep basement)

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 177

2.6 Coverage Probability

2.6.4 Body Loss (1)


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

178

Measured attenuation versus time for a test person walking around in an anechoic chamber

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 178

2.6 Coverage Probability

2.6.5 Body Loss (2)


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

179

Near field of MS antenna without head with head

Calculation model

Head modeled as sphere

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 179

2.6 Coverage Probability

2.6.6 Body Loss (3)


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

180

Test equipment for indirect field strength measurements

Indirect measured field strength penetrated into the head (horizontal cut)

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 180

2.6 Coverage Probability

2.6.7 Interference Margin


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

181

In GSM, the defined minimum carrier-to-interferer ration (C/I) threshold of 9 dB is only valid if the received server signal is not too weak. In the case that e.g. the defined system threshold for the BTS of -111dBm is approached, a higher value of C/I is required in order to maintain the speech quality. According to GSM, this is done by taking into account a correction of 3 dB.

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 181

2.6 Coverage Probability

2.6.8 Degradation (no FH)


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

182

GSM uses a frame correction system, which works with checksum coding and convolutional codes. Under defined conditions, this frame correction works successfully and copes even with fast fading types as Rayleigh or Rician fading. For lower mobile speed or stationary use, the fading has a bigger influence on the bit error rate and hence the speech quality is reduced. In such a case, a degradation margin must be applied. The margin depends on the mobile speed and the usage of slow frequency hopping, which can improve the situation for slow mobiles again.

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 182

2.6 Coverage Probability

2.6.9 Diversity Gain


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

183

This designates the optional usage of a second receiver antenna. The second antenna is placed in a way, which provides some decorrelation of the received signals. In a suitable combiner, the signals are processed in order to achieve a sum signal with a smaller fading variation range. Depending on the receiver type, the signal correlation, and the antenna orientation, a diversity gain from 26 dB is possible.

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 183

2.6 Coverage Probability

2.6.10 Lognormal margin


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

184

Lognormal margin is also called fading margin Due to fading effects, the minimum isotropic power is only received with a certain probability
Signal statistics, lognormal distribution with median power value Fmed and standard deviation (sigma)

Without any margin, the probability is 50%, which is not a sufficient value in order to provide a good call success rate. A typical design goal should be a coverage probability of 90...95%. The following normalised table can be applied to find fading margins for different values of . The fading margin is calculated by multiplying the value of k (in the table) with the standard deviation: Lognormal/Fading Margin = k.

-0.5

1.3

1.65

2.33

Coverage Probability

0%

30%

50%

84%

90%

95%

97.7 %

99%

100 %

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 184

2.6 Coverage Probability

2.6.11 Consideration of Signal Statistics (1)


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

185

Field strength at location x lognormally distributed arround Fmedian

10 0m

100 m

BS

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 185

2.6 Coverage Probability

2.6.12 Consideration of Signal Statistics (2)


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

186

PDF
0,3 0,25 0,2 0,15 0,1 0,05 0

Area representing the coverage probability

Fthreshold Fmedian

received signal level F [dBm]

Local coverage probability:

Pcov = P [ F > Fthreshold ]

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

probability density function (pdf) Folie large Scale (slow) Fading: The lognormal distribution, described by a mean fieldstrength Fmed and a standard deviation s, is shown in the diagram. A coverage probability Pcov can be calculated, which defines the chance that a certain fieldstrength threshold Fthr is reached or exceeded by the calculated (or predicted) mean fieldstrength level Fmed. The variation of the probability in dependence on Fmed is shown in the diagram. The required difference between Fmed and Fthr in order to achieve a required probability is called the fading margin. Without any margin, the probability is 50% (Fmedian), which is not a sufficient value in order to provide a good call success rate. A typical design goal should be a coverage probability of 90...95%. This can be reached by applying a factor s (Fthreshold). (Additional System margin). -> Next Chapter

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 186

2 Coverage Planning

2.7 Cell Range Calculation


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

187

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 187

2.7 Cell Range Calculation

2.7.1 Calculation of Coverage Radius R


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

188

For what Radius R is the average coverage probability in the cell area 95% ?
Frec,med (r) = EIRP - LossHata (r) Loss Hata = f(hBS, hMS, f, r) + Kmor Pcov(r)= P(Frec (r) > Frec,thr) 2 Pcov (r) dr ! = 0.95 <Pcov(R)> = 0 R
R

F rec

Frec,med (r)

F rec, thr

R = f (hBS, hMS, f, Kmor, EIRP, Frec,thr)

r = distance between BTS and MS Frec = received power = Standard deviation

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 188

2.7 Cell Range Calculation

2.7.2 Coverage Probability


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

189

Pcov 0,95

(r)
1

Pcov = P ( Frec > Frec, thr )

0,5

0 R
Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

r
All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 189

2.7 Cell Range Calculation

2.7.3 Coverage Ranges and Hata Correction Factors


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

190

Clutter type
Area Coverage Probability
100%

Cor [dB] [dB] 0 2 4 6 8 10 8 20 15 27 27 6 6 7 7 6 10 8 6 8 5 6

95%

Reference Pat hlo s s [d B]

90%
155 150

85%

145 140 135 130

Skyscrapers Dense urban Medium urban Lower urban Residential Industrial zone Forest Agricultural Low tree density Water Open area

Pcov

80%

125 120 115 110

75%

Calculation conditions:
70% 0,0 1,5 3,0 4,5 6,0 7,5 9,0 10,5

d [km]

Correction = 3; Sigma = 7 hBS = 30 m; hMS = 1.7m; f = 900 Mhz

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

The lognormal distribution, described by a mean fieldstrength Fmed and a standard deviation s, is shown in in the left diagram. A coverage probability Pcov can be calculated, which defines the chance that a certain fieldstrength threshold Fthr is reached or exceeded by the calculated (or predicted) mean fieldstrength level Fmed. This probability is represented by the area enclosed by the graph of the probability density function and the vertical line at F=Fthr in the left diagram. The variation of the probability in dependence on Fmed is shown in the right diagram. The required difference between Fmed and Fthr in order to achieve a required probability is called the fading margin. Without any margin, the probability is 50%, which is not a sufficient value in order to provide a good call success rate. A typical design goal should be a coverage probability of 90...95%. The following normalized table can be applied to find fading margins for different values of s. The fading margin is calculated by multiplying the value of k (in the table) with the standard deviation (Fading Margin = k s).

k Coverage Probability

- 0%

-0.5 30%

0 50%

1 84%

1.3 90%

1.65 95%

2 97.7%

2.33 99%

+ 100%

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 190

2.7 Cell Range Calculation

2.7.4 Conventional BTS Configuration


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

191

TX and RX

1 BTS Omnidirectional antenna for both TX and RX Coverage Range R0 Coverage Area A0

ALCATEL EvoliumTM

TX

TX 45.4 dBm RX -109dBm

R0 A0

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 191

2.7 Cell Range Calculation

2.7.5 Coverage Improvement by Antenna Diversity


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

192

1 BTS Omnidirectional antennas


TX and TX RX

one for both RX and TX one for RXDIV


RXDIV

Antenna diversity gain (2...6 dB)


Example: 3 dB

Coverage range RDiv = 1.23 R0 Coverage area ADiv = 1.5 A0

ALCATEL EvoliumTM

R0

TX 45.4 dBm RX -109dBm

RDiv

A0 ADiv
Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 192

2.7 Cell Range Calculation

2.7.6 Radiation Patterns and Range


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

193

sector omni

3 antennas at sector site, Gain: 18 dBi, HPBW: 65

Resulting antenna footprint ("cloverleaf") compared to an 11 dBi omni antenna

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 193

2.7 Cell Range Calculation

2.7.7 Improvement by Antenna Diversity and Sectorization


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

194

3 BTS Directional antennas (18 dBi) Antenna diversity (3 dB) Max. coverage range Rsec,div = 1.95 R0 Coverage area Asec,div = 3 A0
RXDIV

TX

ALCATEL EvoliumTM ALCATEL EvoliumTM ALCATEL EvoliumTM

R0 Rsec,div

Asec,div

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 194

2.7 Cell Range Calculation

2.7.8 Improvement by Antenna Preamplifier


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

195

3 BTS Directional antennas (18 dBi) Antenna diversity (3 dB) Antenna preamplifier (3dB) Max. coverage range Rsec,div,pre = 2.22 R0 Coverage area Asec,div,pre = 3.9 A0 General:
Asec = g A0 g: Area gain factor
TX RXDIV

R0 Rsec,div,pre

ALCATEL EvoliumTM ALCATEL EvoliumTM ALCATEL EvoliumTM

Asec,div,pre

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 195

2 Coverage Planning

2.8 Antenna Engineering


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

196

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 196

2.8 Antenna Engineering

2.8.1 Omni Antennas


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

197

Application
Large area coverage Umbrella cell for micro cell layer

Advantages
Continuous coverage around the site Simple antenna mounting Ideal for homogeneous terrain

Drawbacks
No mechanical tilt possible Clearance of antenna required Densification of network difficult

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 197

2.8 Antenna Engineering

2.8.2 Sector Antenna


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

198

Antenna with horizontal HPBW of e.g. 90 or 65 Advantages


Coverage can be focussed on special areas Low coverage of areas of no interest (e.g. forest) Allows high traffic load Additional mechanical downtilt possible Wall mounting possible

Drawbacks
More frequencies needed per site compared to omni sites More hardware needed Lower coverage area per sector

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 198

2.8 Antenna Engineering

2.8.3 Typical Applications


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

199

Wide horizontal beam width (e.g. 90)


For areas with few reflecting and scattering objects (rural area) Area coverage for 3-sector sites Sufficient cell overlap to allow successful handovers

Small horizontal beam width (e.g. 65)


For areas with high scattering (city areas) Coverage between sectors by scattering and by adjacent sites (mostly site densification in urban areas)

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 199

2.8 Antenna Engineering

2.8.4 Antenna Tilt


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

200

Downtilting of the Antenna main beam related to the horizontal line Goals:
Reduction of overshoot Removal of insular coverage Lowering the interference Coverage improvement of the near area (indoor coverage) Adjustment of cell borders (handover zones)

Mechanical / Electrical or Combined downtilt

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 200

2.8 Antenna Engineering

2.8.5 Mechanical Downtilt


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

201

Advantages
Later adjustment of vertical tilt possible Antenna diagram is not changed, i.e. nulls and side lobes remain in their position relative to the main beam Cost effective (single antenna type may be used) Fast adjustments possible

Drawbacks
Side lobes are less tilted Accurate adjustment is difficult Problems for sites with difficult access

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 201

2.8 Antenna Engineering

2.8.6 Electrical Downtilt


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

202

=0

Advantages

Drawbacks

=t Same tilt for both downtilt angle main and side lobes =2t Antenna mounting is more simple no =3t adjustment errors = delay time

Introduction of additional antenna types necessary New antenna installation at the site if downtilting is introduced Long antenna optimization phase Adjustment of electrical tilt mostly not possible

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 202

2.8 Antenna Engineering

2.8.7 Combined Downtilt


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

203

Combination of both mechanical and electrical downtilt


High electrical downtilt: Distinct range reduction in sidelobe direction (interference reduction) Less mechanical uptilt in main beam direction

Choose sector antennas with high electrical downtilt (6...8) and apply mechanical uptilt installation for optimum coverage range in main beam direction

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 203

2.8 Antenna Engineering

2.8.8 Assessment of Required Tilts


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

204

Required tilt is estimated using Geometrical Optics Consideration of


Vertical HPBW of the antenna Antenna height above ground Height difference antenna/location to be covered Morpho-structure in the vicinity of the antenna Topography between transmitter and receiver location

Tilt must be applied for both TX and RX antennas!

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 204

2.8 Antenna Engineering

2.8.9 Inter Site Distance in Urban Area


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

205

Using sectorized sites with antennas of 65 horizontal half power beam width
The sidelobe is approximately reduced by 10dB. This is a reduction of cell range to 50%.
X A B X

The inter site distance calculation factor depends on


Type of antenna Type of morpho class
Multi path propagation Scattering Sigma (fading variations)

R2

0.5* R2

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 205

2.8 Antenna Engineering

2.8.10 Downtilt in Urban Area


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

206

Tilt 2 Site A

Tilt 2 Site B

ai n

be

am

e Sid

lob

Cell range R2

0.5* R2

Inter Site Distance A-B = 1.5* R2

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 206

2.8 Antenna Engineering

2.8.11 Downtilt in Urban Area


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

207

The upper limit of the vertical half power beam width is directed towards the ground at maximum cell range
Upper 3dB point of the vertical antenna pattern

To be used in areas with


Multi path propagation condition Good scattering of the beam

Aim
Reduction of interference

Optimization
Coverage Optimization in isolated cases using less downtilt Interference Reduction in isolated cases using more downtilt

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 207

2.8 Antenna Engineering

2.8.12 Downtilt in Suburban and Rural Area


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

208

Downtilt planning for


Suburban Rural Highway Coverage

The main beam is directed towards the ground at maximum cell range
Tilt 1 Tilt 1

Site C

Ma in

Site D
bea m Ma eam in b

Cell range R1 Inter Site Distance C-D = 2* R1

Cell range R1

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 208

2.8 Antenna Engineering

2.8.13 Antenna configurations


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

209

Rx/Tx

Application of Duplexer
Consists of a TX/RX Filter and a combiner one antenna can be saved

Tower Mounted Amplifier (TMA)


Increase Uplink Sensitivity TMA needs to have TX bypass => in case of duplexer usage

Duplex Filter

Diversity
Space diversity Polarization diversity

Tx Rx To BTS
All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 209

2.8 Antenna Engineering

2.8.14 Antenna Configurations for Omni and Sector Sites


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

210

Antenna Configurations for Omni and Sector Sites


Sector antenna
Pole mounting for roof-top mounting

Bracons

Tx

Rxdiv

Rx

Pole

Rxdiv

Rx

Tx

Sector Antenna

Pole
Tower mounting for omni antennas Tower mounting for directional antennas

Pole mounting for wall or parapet mounting

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 210

2.8 Antenna Engineering

2.8.15 Three Sector Antenna Configuration with AD


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

211

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 211

2.8 Antenna Engineering

2.8.16 Antenna Engineering Rules


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

212

Distortion of antenna pattern: No obstacles within


Antenna near field range HPBW Rule plus security margin of 20 First fresnel ellipsoid range (additional losses!)

TX-RX Decoupling to avoid blocking and intermodulation


Required minimum separation of TX - RX antennas dependent on antenna configuration (e.g. duplexer or not)

Diversity gain
Required antenna separation for space diversity

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 212

2.8 Antenna Engineering

2.8.17 Distortion of antenna pattern


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

213

Antenna Near Field Range: Rmin = 2D/


D = Aperture of antenna (e.g. 3m) => Rmin = 60 / 120m for GSM / DCS

HPBW Rule with securtiy margin of 20 and tilt

Roof Top = Obstacle D


Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

= HPBW/2 + 20 + D[m] 1 5 H[m] 0.5 2.5


HPBW = 8, = 2

10 5

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 213

2.8 Antenna Engineering

2.8.18 Tx-Rx Decoupling (1)


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

214

Out of Band Blocking Requirement (GSM Rec. 11.21)


GSM 900 GSM 1800 TX-TX TX-RX GSM TX-RX DCS
P [dBm]
-13

= +8 dBm = 0 dBm = 20 dB = 30 + 10 log (n) dB = 40 + 10 log (n) dB


Receiver Pout Characteristic fuse fint TX RX Pblock Pin P1dB

Required Decoupling (n = number of transmitters)

-101

n*200kHz

fuse

fint

f[MHz]

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 214

2.8 Antenna Engineering

2.8.19 TX-RX Decoupling (2)


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

215

Horizontal separation (Approximation)


Isolation for Horizontal Separation - omni 11dBi
45 40 35 30 25 20 15

dH
Isolation [dB]

GSM1800 GSM900

I =22+20log(d/)-(G +G ) [dB] H H T R

12 12 ,4 12 ,8 13 ,2 13 ,6

Separation [m]

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 215

14 14 ,4 14 ,8 15 ,2

1, 7

2, 7

3, 7

4, 7

5, 7

6, 7

7, 7

8, 7

9, 7 10 ,4 10 ,8 11 ,2 11 ,6

2.8 Antenna Engineering

2.8.20 TX-RX Decoupling (3)


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

216

Vertical separation (Approximation)


Isolation for Vertical Separation
70 60

dv
Isolation [dB]

Mast

50 40 30 20

GSM1800 GSM900

dm
I =28+40log(d /) [dB] V V

10 0 0,2

0,3

0,4

0,5

0,6 Separation [m]

0,7

0,8

0,9

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 216

2.8 Antenna Engineering

2.8.21 Space Diversity


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

217

Required separation for max. diversity gain = F()

RXA dV RXB RXB

dH RXA

For a sufficient low correlation coefficient < 0.7:


dH = 20 => GSM 900: 6m / GSM1800: 3m dV = 15 => GSM 900: 4.5m / GSM1800: 2.25m

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 217

2.8 Antenna Engineering

2.8.22 Power Divider


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

218

Power dividers connect several antennas to one feeder cable For combination of individual antenna patterns for a requested configuration
Quasi-omni configuration Bidirectional configuration (road coverage)

Quasi-Omni Configuration

4-to-1 Power splitter (6 dB loss)

To BTS: Duplexer output (TX plus RX diversity)

To BTS: Receiver input


All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 218

2.8 Antenna Engineering

2.8.23 Power Divider


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

219

w Power divider
s Also called "power splitter" or "junction box" s Passive device (works in both (transmit and receive) direction)
Pin 2 3 dB Pin 2 Pin 3 Pin 3 Pin 3 Pin 4 Pin 4 Pin 4 Pin 4

4.5 dB

6 dB

Pin

Pin

Pin

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 219

2.8 Antenna Engineering

2.8.24 Panel Configurations (1)


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

220

Radial Arrangement
of 6 Panel Antennas with horizontal beamwidth = 105 gain = 16.5 dBi, mast radius = 0.425 m, mounting radius = 0.575 m

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 220

2.8 Antenna Engineering

2.8.25 Panel Configurations (2)


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

221

Example 2: Quasi Omni Arrangement


of 3 antennas with horizontal beamwidth = 105 , gain =13.5 dBi, mounting radius = 4 m

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 221

2.8 Antenna Engineering

2.8.26 Panel Configurations (3)


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

222

Example 3: Skrew Arrangement

of 4 Panel Antennas with horizontal beamwidth = 65 , gain = 12.5 dBi, mast radius = 1 m, mounting radius = 1.615 m

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 222

2.8 Antenna Engineering

2.8.27 Feeders
RNE Fundamentals 1- -

223

Technical summary Inner conductor: Copper wire Dielectric: Low density foam PE

Inner conductor Outer conductor

Outer conductor: Corrugated copper tube Jacket: Polyethylene (PE) black

Dielectric

Jacket

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 223

2.8 Antenna Engineering

2.8.28 Feeder Installation Set and Connectors


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

224

1 Cable Clamps 2 Antenna Cable 3 Double Bearing 4 Counterpart 5 Anchor tape

7/16 Connector: Coaxial Connector Robust Good RF-Performance

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 224

2.8 Antenna Engineering

2.8.29 Feeder Parameters


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

225

Type

Minimum bending radius

Jacket (outer diameter)

Weight (m)

Recommended clamp spacing

Single bending LCF 1/2 LCF 7/8 LCF 1 5/8 70 mm 120 mm 300 mm

Repeated bending 210 mm 360 mm 900 mm 16 mm 28 mm 49.7 mm 0.35 kg 0.62 kg 1.5 kg 0.6 m 0.8 m 1.2 m

GSM 900
Type LCF 1/2 LCF 7/8 LCF 1_5/8 Attenuation /100 m [dB] 6.6 4.0 2.6 Recommended max length [m] 45 75 115

GSM 1800
Attenuation /100 m [dB] 10.3 6.0 4.0 Recommended max length [m] 30 50 75

GSM 1900
Attenuation /100 m [dB] 10.6 6.3 4.2 Recommended max length [m] 28 47 71

These values are based on feeder types with an impedance of 50 ohms

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 225

2.8 Antenna Engineering

2.8.30 Feeder attenuation (1)


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

226

Main contribution is given by feeder loss


Feeder Cable 4dB/100m => length 50m Jumper Cable 0.066dB/1m => 5m Insertion Loss of connector and power splitter Total Loss 2.0dB+2x0.33dB+5x0.1dB+0.1dB Loss =2.0dB Loss =0.33dB < 0.1dB =3.26dB

Cable type is trade off between


Handling flexibility Cost Attenuation

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 226

2.8 Antenna Engineering

2.8.31 Radiating Cables


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

227

w Provide coverage in Tunnels, buildings, along side tracks or lines w Principle: Radiate a weak but constant electromagnetic wave w Suitable for coverage over longer distances (Repeater) w Fieldstrength distribution more constant as with antennas

Repeater

F F
Thr

F F
Thr

Terminating Load

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 227

2.8 Antenna Engineering

2.8.32 Components of a radiating cable system


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

228

w Components are shown with black lines


N-connections
Tx BTS Rx

Radiating cable

Termination load

Jumper cabel

Mounting clips with 50 mm wall standoff

Earthing kit

1-leg radiating cable system

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 228

2.8 Antenna Engineering

2.8.33 Comparison of field strength: Radiating cable and standard antenna


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

229

-40 -50 -60 -70 -80 -90 -100 -110

[dBm]

Cable attenuation between the antennas

Radiating cable field strength Antenna field strength Distance

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 229

2.8 Antenna Engineering

2.8.34 Example of a radiating cable in a tunnel


RNE Fundamentals 1 - - 230

w Example of a radiating cable in a tunnel

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 230

2.8 Antenna Engineering

2.8.35 Microwave antennas, feeders and accessories


RNE Fundamentals 1 - - 231

Microwave point to point systems use highly directional antennas Gain 4 A e


G = 10 lg

with

G = gain over isotropic, in dBi A = area of antenna aperture e = antenna efficiency

w Used antenna types s parabolic antenna s high performance antenna s horn lens antenna s horn antenna

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 231

2.8 Antenna Engineering

2.8.36 Parabolic antenna


RNE Fundamentals 1 - - 232

Parabolic dish, illuminated by a feed horn at its focus Available sizes: 1 (0.3 m) up to 16 (4.8 m) Sizes over 4 seldom used due to installation restrictions Single plane polarized feed vertical (V) or horizontal (H) Also: dual polarized feeder (DP), with separate V and H connections (lower gain) Front-to-back ratios of 45 dB not high enough for back-to-back configuration on the same frequency Antenna patterns are absolutely necessary for interference calculations

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

Parabolic dish, illuminated by a feed horn at its focus. Available in a wide variety of sizes [1 (0.3 m), 2 (0.6 m), 4 (1.2 m), 6 (1.8 m), 8 (2.4 m), 10 (3.0 m) and sometimes up to 16 (4.8 m) in most frequency bands. Sizes over 4 are seldom used due to the installation restrictions on private buildings Mostly with single plane polarised feed, which can be either vertical (V) or horizontal (H) Dual polarized feeds (DP), with separate V and H connections possible DP`s usually have lower gain than single polarized antennas Front-to-back ratios of about 45 dB are not high enough to use these antennas back-to-back on the same frequency (interference calculations) Antenna patterns are absolutely necessary for interference calculations

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 232

2.8 Antenna Engineering

2.8.37 High performance antenna


RNE Fundamentals 1 - - 233

Similar to common parabolic antenna, except for attached cylindrical shield Improvement of front-to-back ratio and wide angle radiation discrimination Available in same sizes as parabolic, single or dual polarized Substantially bigger, heavier, and more expensive than parabolic antennas Allow back-to-back transmission at the same frequency in both directions (refer to interference calculation)

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

Similar to the common parabolic antenna, except for an attached cylindrical shield Improvement of the front-to-back ratio, and wide angle radiation discrimination Available in the same sizes as parabolic ones, either single or double polarised Substantially bigger, heavier, and more expensive than the ordinary parabolics Allow back-to-back transmision at the same frequency in both directions (refer to interference calculation)

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 233

2.8 Antenna Engineering

2.8.38 Horn antennas


RNE Fundamentals 1 - - 234

Horn lens antenna For very high frequencies > 25 GHz Replacement for small parabolic antennas (1) Same electrical data, but easier to install due to size and weight Horn reflector antenna Large parabola, energy from the feed horn is reflected at right angle (90) Gain like 10 parabolic antenna (60 dBi), but higher front-to-back ratios > 70 dB

sBig and heavy, requires a complex installation procedure sOnly used on high capacity microwave backbones (e.g. MSC-MSC interconnections)

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

Horn lens antenna Only available for very high frequencies (above 25 Ghz) Replacement for small parabolic antennas (1) Electrical data nearly the same, but easier to install due to their size and weight Horn reflector antenna Consists of a very large parabola, mounted at such an angle that the energy from the feed horn is reflected at right angle (90) Gain in the region of a 10 parabolic antenna (60 dBi), but it has much higher front-to-back ratios ( 70 dB or more) Very big, heavy and requires a complex installation procedure Only used on high capacity microwave backbones (example: MSC-MSC interconnections).

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 234

2.8 Antenna Engineering

2.8.39 Specific Microwave Antenna Parameters (1)


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

235

Cross polarization discrimination (XPD)


highest level of cross polarisation radiation relative to the main beam; should be > 30 dB for parabolic antennas

Inter-port isolation
isolation between the two ports of dual polarised antennas; typical value: better than 35 dB

Return loss (VSWR)


Quality value for the adaption of antenna impedance to the impedance of the connection cable Return loss is the ratio of the reflected power to the power fed at the antenna input (typical> 20 dB)

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 235

2.8 Antenna Engineering

2.8.40 Specific Microwave Antenna Parameters (2)


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

236

Radiation pattern envelope (RPE)


Tolerance specification for antenna pattern (specification of antenna pattern itself not suitable due to manufacturing problems) Usually available from manufacturer in vertical and horizontal polarisation (worst values of several measurements) Weight Wind load

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 236

2.8 Antenna Engineering

2.8.41 Data sheet 15 GHz


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

237

Bandwidth Model number Nominal diameter

(GHz) (m) (ft) (deg) (dBi) (dBi) (dBi) (dB) (dB) (dB) (kg) (deg)

14.4 - 15.35 14.4 - 15.35 14.4 - 15.35 PA 2 - 144 PA 4 - 144 PA 6 - 144 0.6 1.2 1.8 2 4 6 2.3 36.2 36.5 36.7 42 28 26 19 +/- 5 1.2 42.3 42.5 42.8 48 30 26 43 +/- 5 0.8 45.8 46.0 46.3 52 30 28 73 +/- 5

Bandwidth M odel num ber Nom inal diameter

(GHz) (m ) (ft) (deg) (dBi) (dBi) (dBi) (dB) (dB) (dB) (kg) (deg)

14.4 - 15.35 14.4 - 15.35 14.4 - 15.35 DA2 - 144 DA4 - 144 DA6 - 144 0.6 1.2 1.8 2 4 6 2.3 36.2 36.5 36.7 65 28 26 28 +/- 12 1.2 42.3 42.5 42.8 68 30 26 55 +/- 12 0.8 45.8 46.0 46.3 68 30 26 130 +/- 12

Half-power beamwidth Gain low band Gain mid band Gain high band Front-to-back ratio Cross polar discrimination Return loss W eight W indload Elevation adjustment

Half-power beamwidth Gain low band Gain m id band Gain high band Front-to-back ratio Cross polar discrimination Return loss W eight W indload Elevation adjustment

Parabolic antenna 15 GHz

High performance antenna 15 GHz

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 237

2.8 Antenna Engineering

2.8.42 Radiation pattern envelope


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

238

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 238

2.8 Antenna Engineering

2.8.43 Feeders (1)


RNE Fundamentals 1 - - 239

Coaxial cables or waveguides (according to frequency) Most important characteristic: loss and return loss Coaxial cables
Used between 10 MHz and 3 GHz Dielectric material: foam or air Parameters of common coaxial cables:
type
LCF 1/2 CU2Y LCF 7/8 CU2Y LCF 1 5/8 CU2Y

dielectric
foam foam foam

diameter (mm)
16.0 28.0 49.7

loss (dB/100m)
10,9 / 2 GHz 13.8 / 3 GHz 6.5 / 2 GHz 8.5 / 3 GHz 4.4 / 2 GHz 5.6 / 3 GHz

power rating (kW)


0.47 0.95 1.7

bending radius (mm)


200 360 380

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

Depending on the frequency coaxial cables and waveguides are used for the transmission of RF energy between radio systems and antennas. The most important characteristic of feeders is their loss, but also their impedance (return loss).

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 239

2.8 Antenna Engineering

2.8.44 Feeders (2)


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

240

Waveguides
Used for frequency bands above 2.5 GHz Three basic types available: circular, elliptical and rectangular

Rigid circular waveguide


Very low loss Supports two orthogonal polarisations Capable to carry more than one frequency band Usually, short components of this type are used Disadvantages: cost, handling and moding problems

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 240

2.8 Antenna Engineering

2.8.45 Feeders (3)


RNE Fundamentals 1 - - 241

Elliptical semiflexible waveguides


Acceptable loss, good VSWR performance Low cost and easy to install Various types optimised for many frequency bands up to 23 GHz Used for longer distances (easy and flexible installation) Can be installed as a "single run" (no intermediate flanges)
type
EW 34 EW 52 EW 77 EW 90 EW 220

loss /100 m
2.0 4.0 5.8 10.0 28.0

Frequency
4 GHz 6GHz 8GHz 11 GHz 23 GHz

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 241

2.8 Antenna Engineering

2.8.46 Feeders (4)


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

242

Solid and flexible rectangular waveguides Solid rectangular waveguides


Combination of low VSWR and low loss High cost and difficult to install Used for realising couplers, combiners, filters

type
WR 229 WR159 WR112 WR 90 WR 75

loss /100 m
2.8 4.5 8.5 11.7 15.0

Frequency
4 GHz 6GHz 8GHz 11 GHz 13 GHz

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 242

2.8 Antenna Engineering

2.8.47 Feeders (5)


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

243

Flexible rectangular waveguides


Worse VSWR and losses than for solid waveguides Often used in short lengths (<1 m), where position between connection points depends on actual installation place Common applications: connection of microwave system to antenna (close together on rooftops or towers) for frequencies >13 Ghz

type
PDR140 PDR180 PDR220

loss / m
0.5 1 2

Frequency
15GHz 18 GHz 23 GHz

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 243

2.8 Antenna Engineering

2.8.48 Antenna feeder systems (1)


RNE Fundamentals 1 - - 244

Direct radiating system


Most commonly used for frequencies up to 13 Ghz Depending on accepted feeder loss/length, higher frequencies may be possible Excessive attenuation and costs in long runs of wave guide Occurence of echo distortion due to mismatch in long runs of waveguide possible

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 244

2.8 Antenna Engineering

2.8.49 Antenna feeder systems (2)


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

245

Periscope antenna system


Used for
considerable antenna heights waveguide installation problems

Negligible wave guide cost and easy installation System gain is a function of antenna and reflector size, distance and frequency Used above 4 GHz , because reflector size is prohibitive for lower frequencies

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 245

2.8 Antenna Engineering

2.8.50 Antenna feeder systems (3)


RNE Fundamentals 1 - - 246

Combined antenna with transceiver


Antenna and transceiver are combined as a single unit to cut out wave guide loss (higher frequencies) Units are mounted on top of a mast and connected to multiplex equipment via cable

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 246

2 Coverage Planning

2.9 Alcatel BSS


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

247

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 247

2.9 Alcatel BSS

2.9.1 Architecture of BTS - Evolium Evolution A9100


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

248

Air interface

3 levels
Antenna network stage
ANC or ANB (note) )1)

Antenna network stage


ANC

Antenna coupling level Combiner stage (ANY) Combiner stage (ANY)

TRX level

TRX

TRX

TRX

TRX

TRX

TRX

TRX

TRX

TRX

TRX

TRX

TRX

BCF level

Station unit module Abis interface

Abbreviations BCF TRX Base station Control Function Transceiver

Note 1 : ANB module is limited to 2 TRX in No TX Div mode and to 1 TRX in TX Div mode.

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

s Antenna coupling level The general functions performed at this level are: - Duplexing transmit and receive paths onto common antennas; - Feeding the received signals from the antenna to the receiver front end, where the signals are amplified and distributed to the different receivers (Low Noise Amplifier (LNA) and power splitter functions); - Providing filtering for the transmit and the receive paths; - Combining, if necessary, output signals of different transmitters and connecting them to the antenna(s); - Supervising antennas VSWR (Voltage Standing Wave Ratio). -Powering and supervising TMA through the feeder. s The Antenna Network Combiner (ANC) module - one duplexer allowing a single antenna to be used for the transmission and reception of both downlink and uplink channels- hence minimizing the number of antenna - a frequency selective VSWR meter to monitor antenna feeder and antenna - one LNA amplifying the receive RF signal, and giving good VSWR values, noise compression and good reliability - two splitter levels distributing the received signal to four separate outputs so that each output receives the signal from its dedicated antenna and from the second one (diversity) - one Wide Band Combiner (WBC), concentrating two transmitter outputs into one, only for configurations with more than two TRX - insertion of 12V DC current in the feeder in order to provide power to TMAs when TMAs are used; there is thus no need for separate Power Distribution Unit (PDU) nor Bias-Tee (Feeder Lightning protections, that come with the ANC in case of outdoor BTSs, are themselves of a new type, compatible with this DC power feeding) (This function is only available with the new Evolution version of this module; it can be disabled, even if TMAs are used, in case those TMAs have their own PDUs).

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 248

2.9 Alcatel BSS

2.9.2 EVOLIUMTM A9100 Base Station (1)


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

249

The Antenna network Combiner (ANc)- no-combining mode


Antenna A TXA - RXA - RXdivB Antenna B TXB- RXB - RXdivA

Duplexer Filter Filter LNA Splitter

Duplexer Filter Filter LNA Splitter By-pass function

By-pass function

WBC

Splitter

Splitter

Splitter

Splitter

WBC

TX RXn RXd

RXd RXn TX

TRX 1

TRX 2

No-combining mode & No TX Div mode

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

s The No-combining mode for configuration up to 2 TRX if TX Diversity is not used, or up to one TRX if TX Diversity is used (two TRX ports must then be connected to the two Antenna Connector ports of a same Twin TRX module); in these cases, the Wide Band Combiner is not needed, and therefore bypassed

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 249

2.9 Alcatel BSS

2.9.3 EVOLIUMTM A9100 Base Station (2)


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

250

The Antenna network Combiner (ANc)- Combining mode & No TX Div mode Antenna A Antenna B
TXA - RXA - RXdivB TXB- RXB - RXdivA

Duplexer Filter Filter LNA Splitter

Duplexer Filter LNA Splitter Filter

W BC

Splitter

Splitter

Splitter

Splitter

W BC

TX RXn RXd TRX 1

TX RXn RXd TRX 2

RXdRXn TX TRX 3

RXd RXn TX TRX 4

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

s The Combining mode for configuration from 3 up to 4 TRX if TX Diversity is not used, or up to 2 TRX if TX Diversity is used (two TRX ports must then be connected to the two Antenna Connector ports of a same Twin TRX module); in these cases, the Wide Band combiner is not bypassed, as shown in the figure

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 250

2.9 Alcatel BSS

2.9.4 EVOLIUMTM A9100 Base Station (3)


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

251

wThe Twin Wide Band Combiner stage (ANY) combines up to four transmitters into two outputs, and distributes the two received signals up to four receivers. This module includes twice the same structure, each structure containing: one wide band combiner (WBC), concentrating two transmitter outputs into one two splitters, each one distributing the received signal to two separate outputs providing diversity and non-diversity path

wANy: Twin Wide Band Combiner Stage


TXA RXA RXAdiv RXBdiv RXB TXB

WBC

Splitter Splitter

Splitter Splitter

WBC

TX

RX

RXdiv

TX

RX

RXdiv

Rxdiv RX

TX

Rxdiv RX

TX

TRX 1

TRX 2

TRX 3

TRX 4

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 251

2.9 Alcatel BSS

2.9.5 EVOLIUMTM BTS Features


RNE Fundamentals 1 - - 252

Standard Features according to GSM


DR (Dual Rate), EFR (Enhanced Full Rate coder), AMR (Adaptive Multi Rate) requires that the BSS software release and the other network elements also support these codecs HW supports GSM 850, E-GSM, GSM 900, GSM 1800 and GSM 1900 bands Multi Band Capabilities (supporting of 850/1800 TRX, 850/1900TRX, and, 900 /1800 can be located in the same cabinet) All known A5 algorithms to be supported; HW provisions done

Standard Features due to new Architecture and new SW Releases


SUS (Station Unit Sharing) Only one central control unit (SUM) for all BTS per cabinet Multiband BTS (GSM 900/1800) in one cabinet Static (Release 4) and statistical (Release 6) submultiplexing on Abis
- Better use of Abis-interface capacity: More BTS/TRX to be supported in a multidrop loop

Introduction of GPRS and HSCSD without HW changes EDGE compatible TRX

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

The BTS range supports A5/1 and A5/2 ciphering algorithms; A5/0 = no ciphering is always supported. The TRX are hardware ready for A5/3.

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 252

2.9 Alcatel BSS

2.9.6 EVOLIUMTM BTS Features [cont.]


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

253

Features specific to Radio Performance


TX Output Power (at TRX output)
Frequency band GSM 850 GSM 900 MP (*) GSM 900 HP GSM 1800 MP (*) GSM 1800 HP GSM 1900 TX output power, GMSK 45 W = 46.5 dBm 45 W = 46.5 dBm 60 W = 47.8 dBm 35 W = 45.4 dBm 60 W = 47.8 dBm 45 W = 46.5 dBm TX output power, 8-PSK (EDGE) 15 W = 41.8 dBm 30 W = 44.8 dBm 30 W = 44.8 dBm 30 W = 44.8 dBm 30 W = 44.8 dBm 25 W = 44.0 dBm

RX Sensitivity:

-111 dBm certified (GSM|ETSI| request: -104 dBm) Synthesized Frequency Hopping as general solution
Standard RF hopping mode Pseudo baseband RF hopping mode

Antenna Diversity in general


Two or four antennas (RX) per sector TX Diversity feature is possible with Twin TRX module in coverage mode only.

Duplexer (TX and RX on one antenna) as general solution Multiband capabilities


Thanks to the high flexibility of the EVOLIUM A9100 Base Station, GSM 850 and GSM 1800 TRXs or GSM 850 and GSM 1900 TRXs or GSM 900 and GSM 1800 TRXs or GSM 900 and GSM 1900 TRXs can be located in the same cabinet with a single Station Unit Module (SUM).
Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

(*) Note that for the Twin TRX, the TX output powers above are in capacity mode, i.e. each of the functional TRX achieves these output powers. In coverage mode, i.e. with Tx Diversity, a significant extra gain has to be considered (see "TX Diversity" chapter) thanks to on-air combining and diversity. The diagram below shows that 4RX Diversity requires two Antenna Network modules per sector, thereby needing either 4 vertical-polarized or 2 cross-polarized antennas.
TX1 RX1 RX2 0 TX 2 RX3 RX4

A nte nna N etw ork

A nte nna N etw ork

TW IN

T RX

Figure : Twin TRX module in TX Div & 4 RX div

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 253

2.9 Alcatel BSS

2.9.6 EVOLIUMTM BTS Features [cont.]


RNE Fundamentals -

T R X

TRX TRX
1- -

254

w Capacity Mode Principle

1 TWIN module = 2 functional TRX 1 Housing = 2 functional TRX = 16 radio timeslots Same Radio Performances as EDGE + TRX Medium Power TRX

TRX 1

2
Tx Tx:: Rx Rx:: GSM GSM 900 900 ::45 45W WGMSK GMSK//30 30W W8PSK 8PSK GSM 1800 : 35 W GMSK / 30 W 8PSK GSM 1800 : 35 W GMSK / 30 W 8PSK Sensitivity Sensitivity< <-114 -114dBm dBm
(-114 (-114to to-117 -117dBm dBmwith with22Rx Rxdiversity diversityenvironment environmentdependent) dependent)

Reduced Power Consumption

Saving Savingper perTRX TRX(vs. (vs.TRX TRXEDGE+): EDGE+): --17 % in GSM 900 17 % in GSM 900 --35 35% %in inGSM GSM1800 1800
Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

2 TRXs can belong to different sectors

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 254

2.9 Alcatel BSS

2.9.6 EVOLIUMTM BTS Features [cont.]


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

255

w Coverage Mode Principle


Higher Output Power 1 TWIN module = 1 functional TRX = 8 radio TS 2 RX & 4 RX diversity possible TX diversity used ( very high coverage) Gain in sites (less sites needed) This mode is also called TX div mode Up to 12 TRX in MBI5/MBO2 cabinets

Higher Sensitivity

Tx Tx:: Rx Rx::

GSM GSM900 900::113 113to to175 175W W(*) (*)GMSK GMSK GSM 1800 : 88 to 136 W (*) GMSK GSM 1800 : 88 to 136 W (*) GMSK Equ. Equ.sensitivity sensitivity= =-117.4 -117.4to to--121 121dBm dBm(*) (*)(4RX (4RXdiv) div) (*) (*) environment environmentdependent) dependent)
All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 255

2.9 Alcatel BSS

2.9.6 EVOLIUMTM BTS Features [cont.]


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

256

w 2 RX Diversity
The TRX module supports enhanced diversity combining in all frequency bands, which is based on several algorithms: A beam-forming algorithm to improve the received signal by steering a beam in the direction of the mobile. This is one way of doing smart antennas, An algorithm to reduce interference: this mitigates the influence of interferers by steering a null beam in the direction of the main interferer (the phase difference between the two antennas for the strongest interfering signal is estimated and then this interfering signal is strongly attenuated by summing the signals with an inversed phase).
strong interferer User

Environment Dense Urban (TU3) Sub Urban (TU50) Rural (RA100)

Total 2RX diversity gain 6 dB 5 dB 3.5 dB

Equivalent RX sensitivity (without TMA) -117dBm -116dBm -114.5dBm

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 256

2.9 Alcatel BSS

2.9.6 EVOLIUMTM BTS Features [cont.]


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

257

w 4 RX Diversity
s 4 RX diversity is supported by the Twin TRX module in coverage mode only. It uses exactly the same

algorithms as for 2Rx diversity, i.e. beam-forming techniques are implemented. The table below provides the typical gains achieved thanks to 4RX enhanced Diversity and the equivalent Rx sensitivity that can be considered for link budget calculations.

Environment Dense Urban (TU3) Sub Urban (TU50) Rural (RA100)

Total 4RX diversity gain 10 dB 8.6 dB 6.4 dB

Equivalent RX sensitivity (without TMA) -121dBm -119.6dBm -117.4dBm

s 4 RX diversity also provides significant benefits for GPRS/EDGE since it allows achieving higher

throughputs for given radio conditions.

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 257

2.9 Alcatel BSS

2.9.7 Generic Configurations for A9100 G4/5 BTS


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

258

The configurations for indoor (MBI) and outdoor (MBO) cabinet are presented in the next slides larger configurations with more than one cabinet can be derived from the tables configurations are valid for EDGE capable TRX (Evolution step 2) availability of multiband configurations other than GSM 900 / GSM 1800 must be checked with product management (authorization required) Notation:
BBU - Battery Backup Unit BATS - Small Battery Backup LBBU - Large Battery Backup Unit

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

TWIN TWIN TWIN TWIN

TRX

TRX

TRX

TRX

TWIN TWIN S U M A N Y TRX TRX

A N C

TWIN TWIN A N Y TRX TRX

A N Y

A N Y

A N C

S U M

Available space for either: Mounting Frame for 19" equipment (6U) Battery

TWIN TWIN A N Y TRX TRX

A N C

TWIN TWIN A N Y TRX TRX

TWIN TWIN A N Y A N Y A N C TRX TRX

Available space for either: Mounting Frame for 19" equipment (6U) Battery

Indoor MBI5 3x8


TWIN TWIN A N Y A N Y A N C TRX TRX

TWIN TWIN A N Y TRX TRX

A N C

TWIN TWIN A N Y TRX TRX

A//DC conversion

Mounting Frame for 19" equipment (3U)

TWIN TWIN TWIN TWIN

TRX

TRX

TRX

TRX

Outdoor MBO2 3x8

Stand

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 258

2.9 Alcatel BSS

2.9.8 Non multi-band configurations


RNE Fundamentals Sectors Min TRX per sect. MBI3 Max TRX per sector MBI5 (Note 4) CBO MBO1 Evoluti on MBO2 Evoluti on Notes Frequency bands

1- -

259

AC BU5 Standard(3) no TX div Standard(3) no TX div Standard(3) no TX div Standard(3) no TX div 1 2 3 4 1 1 1 1 8 4 2

AC other 8 4 2 2

DC

AC BU90

AC BU5 8 8 4 4

AC Other 8 8 6 4

DC

AC

DC

8 6 4 2

8 8 4 4

8 8 8 6

4 2 1*

6 3 2

8 6 4 2**

8 8 8 6 * No BU5 * No BU5 ** MBO1 Evo. only

900/1800 (2) 900/1800 (2) 900/1800 (2) 900/1800 (2)

Low-loss no TX div Low-loss no TX div Low-loss no TX div

1 2 3

3 3 3

8 3

10 4

12 6

16 8 4

16 10 6

16 10 6

16 12 8

12 6

16 12 8

900/1800 (2) 900/1800 (2) 900/1800 (2)

Standard TX div & 2 RX div Standard TX div & 2 RX div Standard TX div & 2 RX div

1 2 3

1 1 1

4 2 1

4 2 2

4 2 2

4 4 2

4 4 2

4 4 2

4 4 2

2 1

2 1 1

4 2 2

4 4 2

900/1800 (2) 900/1800 (2) 900/1800 (2)

Low loss TX div & 4 RX div Low loss TX div & 4 RX div Low loss TX div & 4 RX div

1 2 3

1 1 1

2 2

2 2

2 2

2 2 2

2 2 2

2 2 2

2 2 2

2 2

2 2 2

900/1800 (2) 900/1800 (2) 900/1800 (2)

sNote 1: "AC other" is referring to the Indoor AC configurations without integrated battery, i.e. either with no battery, or with batteries in an external cabinet. sNote 2: Frequency bands: new modules are available initially in GSM 900 and GSM 1800 frequency band; they will be available in a second step in GSM 850 and GSM 1900, on market request. sNote 3: As described in chapter "Standard configurations" above, "Standard" is referring to configurations with 1 Antenna Network per sector, and are thus limited to 8 TRXs per sector. Configurations with more than 8 TRXs per sector need two Antenna Networks per sector; such configurations are called "Low-loss" and described in a separate section of the table. sNote 4: With MBI5, more than 18 TRX per cabinet is only possible with DC cabinets (and using TWIN modules) and more precisely with functional variant 3BK 25965 ABxx of these cabinets, that has become since end 2006 the standard delivery; MBI5 with functional variant 3BK 25965 AAxx, are limited to 18 TRX (using TWIN modules); functional variant of a cabinet can be checked either on site (on printed Barcode label, or available through Line Maintenance Terminal), or from the OMC-R where it is part of the Remote Inventory data.

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 259

2.9 Alcatel BSS

2.9.9 Multi-band configurations


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

260

Sectors

Min TRX per sect. band1/ band2 AC BU5

Max TRX per sector (band 1/ band 2) MBO1 Evolution MBO2 Evolution

Notes

Frequency

(3)

MBI3

MBI5 (Note 4)

CBO

bands

AC othe r

DC

AC BU90 8/8 4/4 2/2

AC

AC

DC

AC

DC

BU5 Other 8/8 4/4 2/2 8/8 4/4 2/2 12/12 6/6 4/4 2/2 4/2 6/6 2/2 12/12 6/6 4/4 900/1800 900/1800 900/1800
(2)

Standard no TX div Standard no TX div Standard no TX div

1 2 3

1/1 1/1 1/1

2/2

2/2 6/6

(2)

(2)

sNote 1: "AC other" is referring to the Indoor AC configurations without integrated battery, i.e. either with no battery, or with batteries in an external cabinet. sNote 2: Frequency bands: new modules are available initially in GSM 900 and GSM 1800 frequency band; they will be available in a second step in GSM 850 and GSM 1900, on market request. sNote 3: Count of sectors is made with hypothese of multiband cell, i.e. that each sector contains one cell in band1 and one cell in band2, these two cells being paired as a single "multiband cell", counted as one sector. In multiband "without multiband cell", a same configurations would be counted as having twice the number of sectors. The table above thus describes at the same time - possible configurations for multiband "with multiband cell" - those configurations for multiband "without multiband cell" that have the same number of sectors in each band sNote 4: With MBI5, more than 18 TRX per cabinet is only possible with DC cabinets (and using Twin TRX modules) and more precisely with functional variant 3BK 25965 ABxx of these cabinets, that has become since end 2006 the standard delivery; MBI5 with functional variant 3BK 25965 AAxx, are limited to 18 TRX (using Twin TRX modules); functional variant of a cabinet can be checked either on site (on printed Barcode label, or available through Line Maintenance Terminal), or from the OMC-R where it is part of the Remote Inventory data.

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 260

2.9 Alcatel BSS

2.9.10 Extended cell configurations


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

261

Min. Number Inner

of TRX Outer

Max. number Inner

of TRX Outer

Type of cabinet

Frequency band

1 1

1 1

8 4

8 4

MBI5; MBO2 evolution MBI3; MBO1 Evolution

900 900

Extended Cell configurations

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 261

2.9 Alcatel BSS

2.9.11 Standard configurations


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

262

w The interface with the antenna system is through one single Antenna network combining (ANC) module in each sector (and then through 2 feeders and two antennas or one dual-polarized antenna).
Antenna Antenna Antenna Antenna Antenna Antenna Antenna Antenna

No-combining ANC or ANB

Combining ANC

Combining ANC

Combining ANC

TRX 1 TRX 2

TRX 1

TRX 4

TRX 1 TRX 2 Combiner (ANY) TRX 3 TRX 6

Combiner (ANY) TRX 1 TRX 4

Combiner (ANY) TRX 5 TRX 8

1 up to2TRX/ sector

3 up to 4TRX/ sector

5 up to 6TRX/ sector

5 up to 8RX/sector

Standard configurations with Twin TRX in No TX Div

w The number of sectors and TRXs depends on the cabinet type, with a maximum of 6 sectors and 24 TRXs in a Indoor MBI5 ("AB" functional variant) or an Outdoor MBO2 evolution cabinet.
Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 262

2.9 Alcatel BSS

2.9.12 TRX Types


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

263

Example of TRE boards with their frequency band and power characteristics
NAME BAND POWER W TRAL TRAG TRAGE TAGH TAGHE TRAD TRADE TRAP TRDH TADH TADHE TGT09 TGT18 850 900 900 900 900 1800 1800 1900 1800 1800 1800 900 1800 MP MP MP HP HP MP MP MP HP HP HP 45W 45W 45W 60W 60W 35W 35W 45W 60W 60W 60W 45W 35W GMSK dBm 46,5 46,5 46,5 47,7 47,8 45,4 45,4 46,5 47,7 47,7 46,8 46,5 45,4 25W 30W 30W 30W 44,0 44,8 44,8 44,8 W 15W 15W 30W 25W 30W 12W 30W 25W 8PSK dBm 41,8 41,8 44,8 44,0 41,8 40,8 44,8 40,0

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

GMSK Gaussian Minimum Shift Keying 8PSK 8 phase shift keying TGT Twin GSM Tranceiver Different Transceivers are used depending on the band : 900, 1800, 1900 (in America) and 850MHz (this new band has been introduced in the Release 1999 of the 3GPP Standard). The list above is not exhaustive. A new Tx Rx hardware module gives the possibility to have per Hardware module transmission receiption function. In this case the module is called Twin TRX For example In the MBI5 rack, the number of hardware module is 12 maximum, but if all are Twin TRX the maximum number of Transmitter functions will be 24. (TRE G5) The new Twin TRX (TGT) gives also the possibility to provide TX diversity

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 263

2.9 Alcatel BSS

2.9.12 TRX Types


RNE Fundamentals 1 - - 264

The losses between TRE connector and the Antenna connector

Configuration 1 ANC without bridges 1 ANC 1 ANC + 1 ANY 1 ANX 1 ANX / 1 ANY 1 ANX + 2 ANY delta ANY

Transmission loss (dB) 1.8 5.1 8.6 1.8 5.3 8.8 3.5

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

Losses due to the Antenna Network (AN)

Module ANC ANC no bridge ANX ANY Radio cables TRE-AN AN-AN AN-Antenna

Transmission loss (dB) 4.4 1 1 3.3

0.3 0.2 0.5

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 264

2.9 Alcatel BSS

2.9.13 BTS Output Power


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

265

What is monitored during validation is the BTS output power at antenna connector The individual losses for duplexer, combiner and internal cabling are not systematically measured for detailed info consult the BTS product description

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 265

2.9 Alcatel BSS

2.9.14 Feature Power Balancing


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

266

From G4 (now G5) BTS it is allowed to use TRXs of different power within the same sector, or to use of different combining path for TRX belonging to the same sector. Reason: the G4 BTS is able to detect unbalanced losses/powers within a sector and automatically compensate it for GMSK modulation. Consequence: All TRX connected to one ANc are automatically adjusted to the GMSK output power of the weakest TRX (required for BCCH recovery)

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 266

2.9 Alcatel BSS

2.9.15 Cell Split Feature


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

267

Principle
Cell Split allows to provide one logical cell with one common BCCH over several BTS cabinets. The cabinets must be synchronized

Benefits
Same number of TRX in fewer racks No need to touch/modify the configuration of existing BTS (cabling) Take full benefit of 24 TRX per cabinet

Drawback: more complex antenna system Applications


Multi-band cells Configuration extension of sites by adding TRX Large configurations

Condition: BTS must be synchronized

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

Configuration built with several cabinets and the cell split over two BTSs feature It is possible to optimize the number of cabinets needed for a site configuration (indoor or outdoor, single band or multi-band) built with more than one cabinet, thanks to a feature called cell split over two BTSs. In that case, the TRXs of one sector can be split over two A9100 BTS cabinets. Various configurations are possible, the only constraint being that following conditions are fulfilled: Maximal number of TRX per cell is 16. Maximal number of cabinets between which a given cell is shared is 2. Cabinets between which a cell is shared are clock synchronised in a master / slave configuration Note : when used in mono band configurations, cell split feature may allow to reduce the number of cabinets with regards to the solution with one cabinet per sector; but at the expense of a more complex antenna system (two ANC, hence 4 feeders per sector instead of 2 feeders, as for "low-loss" configurations); this has to be considered before selecting such a solution.

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 267

2.9 Alcatel BSS

2.9.19 Cell Split Example: High Power Configuration


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

268

The following figure gives an example of standard multi-band with multi-band cell 3x8/3x8 in 2 MBI5 cabinets :

ANC

ANC

ANC

Cabinet1 (Standard 8,8,8TRX)


TRX 1

ANY
TRX 4

ANY
TRX 5 TRX 8 TRX 1

ANY
TRX 4

ANY
TRX 5 TRX 8 TRX 1

ANY
TRX 4

ANY
TRX 5 TRX 8

ANC

ANC

ANC

ANY

ANY
TRX 5 TRX 8 TRX 1

ANY
TRX 4

ANY
TRX 5 TRX 8 TRX 1

ANY
TRX 4

ANY
TRX 5 TRX 8

Cabinet2 (Standard 8,8,8TRX)

TRX 1

TRX 4

Sector1: 1x16 TRX

Sector2: 1x16 TRX

Sector3: 1x16 TRX

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

For a MBI5, in a 3 sector configuration, max. 3 HP TRX /sector are allowed (thermal reasons). The only wayto have 3x6 in MBI5 is with the cell split feature.

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 268

2.9 Alcatel BSS

2.9.22 Indoor BTS Rack Layout


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

269

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

IND mini: 4carrier, 1 Duplexer (Anx), 1 Combiner (Any), SUM (CPU, Link to BSC) IND Medi: 12carrier, 3 Duplexer (Anx), 3 Combiner (Any), SUM (CPU, Link to BSC)

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 269

2.9 Alcatel BSS

2.9.23 Outdoor MBO1 Evolution and MBO2 Evolution cabinets


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

270

External Dimensions Depth (floor level) Depth (roof level) Height without plintht Height with plinth Width

74 cm 80 cm 146 cm 161 cm 94 cm

74 cm 80 cm 146 cm 161 cm 156 cm

Available space for either: Mounting Frame for 19" equipment (6U) Battery

MBO1 Evolution

MBO2 Evolution

Radio subrack

Radio subrack

Radio subrack

Radio subrack

Available space for either: Mounting Frame for 19" equipment (6U) Battery

Radio subrack

Radio subrack

A//DC conversion

Mounting Frame for 19" equipment (3U)

wThe Multi-standard Outdoor BaseStation cabinets MBO1 Evolution and MBO2 Evolution offer operators important flexibility with: s An easy extension on-site from the Outdoor MBO1 Evolution BTS (up to 12 TRXs capacity) to the Outdoor MBO2 Evolution BTS (up to 24 TRXs capacity)

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 270

2.9 Alcatel BSS

2.9.24 Micro BTS types


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

271

M5M EVOLIUM A9110 Micro-BTS (M5M)


Introduced in Q3 2003 up to 12 TRX-es site configurations can mix older A910 with newer A9110-E support for GPRS and EDGE (release dependent)

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 271

2.9 Alcatel BSS

2.9.25 Technical Data


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

272

Frequency band

Tx output power (at antenna connector) Rx sensitivity Radio FH Temperature range (max.) Max. power consumption Size (volume) Weight

A910 A9110 (2 TRX) (2 TRX) GSM 850, E-GSM, GSM 850, E-GSM, GSM900, GSM 1800, GSM GSM900, GSM 1800, GSM 1900 1900 Up to 4.5 W 7W -107 dBm Yes 55 C 130 W 54 litres 39.6 kg (incl. connection box) -110 dBm yes 55 C 145 W 54 litres 32.5

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 272

2.9 Alcatel BSS

2.9.26 BSC capacities in terms of boards


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

273

Three BSC capacities are defined depending on the number of TRXs


BSC Capacity Equipment ATCA shelf CCP Spare CCP TPGSM OMCP SSW LIU shelf MUX LIU 8 1 200 TRX 400 TRX 600 TRX 1 2 1 2 2 2 1 2 16 3

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

The quantity of TPGSM, OMCP, SSW and MUX boards have to be considered as 1 activ + 1 stand-by for redundancy function in the shelf. LIU Line Interface Unit 16x 2Mbit/Board

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 273

2.9 Alcatel BSS

2.9.27 Capacity and dimensioning for E1 links


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

274

The BSC Evolution is able to process up to 2600 erlangs


BSC Capacity Equipment Max number of BTS Max number of cells Total number of E1 Number of Abis
Number of Atermux CS Number of Atermux PS

200 TRX 400 TRX 600 TRX 150 200 112 96 10 6 255 264 128 96 20 12 1800 24 255 264 224 176 30 18 2600 36

900 Traffic Ater PS (Mb/s) Max 12

Number of Erlangs

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 274

2.9 Alcatel BSS

2.9.28 Abis and atermux allocation on LIU boards


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

275

Abis and atermux allocation on LIU boards versus BSC capacity


600 TRX 400 TRX 200 TRX LIU 1 LIU 2 LIU 3 LIU 4 LIU 5 1 17 33 49 65 2 18 34 50 66 3 19 35 51 67 4 20 36 52 68 5 21 37 53 69 6 22 38 54 70 7 23 39 55 71 8 24 40 56 72 9 25 41 57 73 10 26 42 58 74 11 27 43 59 75 12 28 44 60 76 13 29 45 61 77 14 30 46 62 78 15 31 47 63 79 16 32 48 64 80
Abis ports

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

LIU 6 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96

LIU 7 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112

LIU 8 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128

600 TRX 400 TRX 200 TRX LIU 9 LIU 10 LIU 11 LIU 12 LIU 13 LIU 14 LIU 15 LIU 16 129 145 161 41 31 21 2 1 130 145 162 42 32 22 4 3 131 147 163 43 33 23 6 5 132 148 164 44 34 24 8 7 133 149 165 45 35 25 10 9 134 150 166 46 36 26 12 11 135 151 167 47 37 27 14 13 136 152 168 48 38 28 16 15 137 153 169 x 39 29 18 17 138 154 170 x 40 30 20 19 139 155 171 x 24 18 12 11 140 156 172 x 23 17 10 9 141 157 173 28 22 16 8 7 142 158 174 27 21 15 6 5 143 159 175 26 20 14 4 3 144 160 176 25 19 13 2 1
Ater Ports

400

400

200

One ater LIU board for 200 TRX

Abis ports (max 176) Atermux CS (max 48) Ater mux PS (max 28)

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

200

Maximum flexibility on abis LIU board

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

LIU boards are fitted in the LIU shelf depending on the BSC configuration (Capacity + connectivity), but only 2 HW configurations for the LIU shelf are considered: one with 8 LIU boards, one with 16 LIU boards, Assignment to each LIU boards either to Abis or Ater, On the Ater LIU, 10 TP are generic (can be assigned either to PS, full CS or a mixed of the 2), and the 6 others are dedicated to PS. In case of 200 TRX configuration, Alcatel decided to split the traffic up to 2 LIU boards (even if one LIU board should be efficient) in order to not impact all the traffic in case of one LIU board failure. The maximum of available LIU boards are used for Abis, to offer maximum flexibility to the clients. The port numbered 9, 10, 11 and 12 on the LIU 12 are not used.

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 275

2 Coverage Planning

2.10 Coveradge Improvement


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

276

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 276

2.10 Coveradge Improvement

2.10.1 Antenna Diversity


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

277

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 277

2.10.1 Antenna Diversity

2.10.1.1 Diversity
RNE Fundamentals 1- -

278

Purpose
Improvement in fading probability statistics leads to a better total signal level or better total S/N ratio

Demands
correlation between different signal branches should be low

Combining methods
Selection Diversity Maximum Ratio Combining Equal Gain Combining

Principle
Combining signals with same information from different signal branches

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

Purpose The purpose of using diversity is to reduce short-term fading effects, such that an acceptable level of performance (receiver sensitivity) can be achieved, without having to increase the transmitted power or the bandwidth. Principle The principle relies on the combination of two or more signals, containing the same information, which are at least partially de-correlated. If two signals of the same level are completely de-correlated, the probability that both signals experience the same depth of fade is very low. Therefore the signal reliability is increased.

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 278

2.10.1 Antenna Diversity

2.10.1.2 Selection Diversity (1)


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

279

Principle
selection of the highest baseband signal-to-noise ratio (S/N) or of the strongest signal (S+N)

Fieldstrength [dBm]

-80

Correlation of signal levels


-90

-100 Antenna 1 Antenna 2

a lower correlation between signal levels of different branches improves the total signal level

Correlation of signal levels should be low


0.3 0.4

0.1

0.2

Time [sec]

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

The algorithm for the selective diversity combining technique is based on the principle of selecting the best signal among all of the signals received from different branches, at the receiving end.

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 279

2.10.1 Antenna Diversity

2.10.1.3 Selection Diversity (2)


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

280

Difference in signal level


a high difference in signal levels of two branches doesnt improve the total signal level
Fieldstrength [dBm]
-80

Difference in signal levels should be low

-90

-100 Antenna 2

Antenna 1

0.1

0.2

0.3

0.4

Time [sec]

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 280

2.10.1 Antenna Diversity

2.10.1.4 Selection Diversity (3)


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

281

Theoretical diversity gain


10dB for two-branch diversity at the 99% reliability level 16dB for four branches at the 99% reliability level

The theoretical diversity gain doesnt improve linear with the number of branches

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 281

2.10.1 Antenna Diversity

2.10.1.5 Equal Gain Combining (1)


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

282

Principle
cophase signal branches sum up signals

Coherent addition of signals and incoherent addition of noises Theoretical diversity gain
11dB for two-branch diversity at the 99% reliability level

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

In comparison with MRC, in this technique the branch weights are all set to unity but the signal from each branch are co-phased to provide equal gain combining diversity. The possibility of producing an acceptable signal from a number of unacceptable inputs is still retained, and performance is only marginally inferior to maximal ratio combining an superior to selection diversity.

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 282

2.10.1 Antenna Diversity

2.10.1.6 Equal Gain Combining (2)


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

283

Correlation of signal levels


a lower correlation between signal levels of different branches improves the total S/N ratio

Difference in signal level


Assuming equal noise in the branches, the higher the difference in signal levels is, the higher is the loss of S/N ratio of the better signal branch after summation

Correlation of signal levels should be low low

Difference in signal levels should be

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 283

2.10.1 Antenna Diversity

2.10.1.7 Maximum Ratio Combining (1)


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

284

Principle
weight signals proportionally to their S/N ratios cophase signal branches sum up the weighted signals

Coherent addition of signals and incoherent addition of noises Improved S/N

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

In this method the signals from all the branches are weighted according to their individual S/N and then summed. Here the individual signals must be co-phased before being summed ( unlike selection diversity ) which generally requires an individual receiver and phasing circuit for each antenna . Maximal ratio combining produces an output SNR equal to the sum of the individual SNRs. Thus, it has the advantage of producing an output with an acceptable SNR even when none of the individual signals are themselves acceptable. This technique gives the best statistical reduction of fading of any known diversity combiner. Modern DSPs and digital receivers are now making this optimal form of diversity practical.

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 284

2.10.1 Antenna Diversity

2.10.1.8 Maximum Ratio Combining (2)


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

285

Correlation of signal levels


a lower correlation between signal levels of different branches improves the total S/N ratio

Difference in signal level


Assuming equal noise in the branches, the higher the difference in signal levels is, the higher is the loss of S/N ratio of the better signal branch after summation comparing to equal ratio combining, this combining reduces influence of worse signal branches

Correlation of signal levels should be low

Difference in signal levels should be low

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 285

2.10.1 Antenna Diversity

2.10.1.9 Comparison of combining methods


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

286

Improvement of average SNR from a diversity combiner compared to one branch


(a) Maximum Ratio Combining (b) Equal Gain Combining (c) Selection Diversity

The maximum ratio combining, which is used in the ALCATEL BTS, gives the best statistical reduction of any known linear diversity combiner.

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 286

2.10.1 Antenna Diversity

2.10.1.10 Enhanced Diversity Combining (1)


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

287

Principle:
2 algorithms
Beam forming algorithm (available also for MRC) Interference reduction algorithm (new)

best efficiency when the useful signal and the interfering signals come from different directions.

Requirements to benefit from this feature:


Hardware: G4 (onwards) TRE (Edge capable TRX) installed in Evolium Evolution BTS step1 resp. step 2 (internal name: G3 resp. G4) Software release: from B6.2 onwards For a maximum gain: antenna engineering rules respected
Correct antenna choice for the considered environment Correct antenna spacings and orientations (in case of space diversity)

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

s The TRX module supports enhanced diversity combining in all frequency bands, which is based on several algorithms:

A beam-forming algorithm to improve the received signal by steering a beam in the direction of the mobile. This is one way of doing smart antennas, An algorithm to reduce interference: this mitigates the influence of interferers by steering a null beam in the direction of the main interferer (the phase difference between the two antennas for the strongest interfering signal is estimated and then this interfering signal is strongly attenuated by summing the signals with an inversed phase).

s Maximum efficiency of enhanced diversity combining is achieved when the useful/desired signal and the interfering signals emanate from different directions. In interference-limited environments, beam-forming algorithms will provide a much greater diversity gain compared to traditional maximum ratio combining.

The above mentioned algorithms are working together in a way to combat spatial interferer signals while keeping optimal sensitivity perfomance for undisturbed but week reception.

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 287

2.10.1 Antenna Diversity

2.10.1.11 Enhanced Diversity Combining (2)


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

288

wDiversity gain coming from the fact that the signals received on both antennas are decorrelated (this requires using Xpol antennas or largely spaced antennas) wArray-Gain or Beamforming gain : coming from the fact, that co-phased signals are added (stronger combined signal power) for this direction wNull Steering / Interference Reduction (with a spatial interferer) coming from a algorithm which reduces the interference (the figures below assume a standard interference margin is considered for the link budget)

Environment

Total 2RX diversity gain

Equivalent RX sensitivity (without TMA)

Dense Urban (TU3) Sub Urban (TU50) Rural (RA100)

6 dB 5 dB 3.5 dB

-117dBm -116dBm -114.5dBm

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 288

2.10.1 Antenna Diversity

2.10.1.12 Tx Diversity
RNE Fundamentals 1- -

289

Basic Idea: Transmit twice the same signal from two antennas No combining losses (on air combining) 3dB gain Possible Issue: Coherence between signal can lead to destructive effects This effect depends on the environment a short delay is introduced between two antennas (2 symbols)
Environment Dense Urban (TU3) Sub Urban (TU50) Rural (RA100) Total TX diversity gain 5.9 dB 4.6 dB 4 dB Equivalent TX output power (GMSK) GSM900: 52.4dBm (175W) GSM1800: 51.3dBm (136W) GSM900: 51.1dBm (129W) GSM1800: 50dBm (100W) GSM900: 50.5dBm (113W) GSM1800: 49.4dBm (88W)

BTS

MS

0011000101001

0011000101001 short delay

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

s TX Diversity works with all types of Mobile stations since it is fully transparent to the receiver; this feature takes advantage of the MS equalizer which can already handle multiple paths with different times of arrival. s Consequently, the equivalent TX output power is very high, up to 6dB above the nominal TX output power, which improves the coverage and reduces the number of sites needed to cover a given area, provided the link budget remains balanced or downlink-limited s The table provides the typical gains achieved thanks to TX Diversity and the equivalent TX output power that can be considered for link budget calculations. Note that such gains are environment-dependent since they are highly related to the level of de-correlation between paths. s In 8-PSK, the TX diversity gain is highly dependent on the coding scheme, the environment and the level of Carrier to Interference+Noise Ratio. No significant gains are expected.

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 289

2.10.1 Antenna Diversity

2.10.1.12 Tx Diversity
RNE Fundamentals 1- -

290

Diversity Gain:
On top of the output power increase TxDiv artificially increases the number of multi-paths The higher the de-correlation between paths, the higher the gain Other features: a) high power TRX or b) Transmit Coherent Combining do not benefit from this effect
Time

Example:
2 paths (blue and red) They show independent amplitude (fast) fading Probability to fall in a hole is reduced Fading holes of a channel are often compensated by the other channel

Fading hole Attenuation

First channel Second channel

Additional gain
Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 290

2.10.1 Antenna Diversity

2.10.1.12 Tx Diversity
RNE Fundamentals 1- -

291

Delay Trade-Off
Higher delay between antennas implies
Less destructive effect, more de-correlated paths and so higher diversity gain: Higher Gains Higher channel delay spread: More Self-interference 0011000101001

0011000101001 short delay

Alcatel found the optimal trade-off


For all environments Based on extensive simulations and lab measurements

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 291

2.10.1 Antenna Diversity

2.10.1.12 Tx Diversity
RNE Fundamentals 1- -

292

Summary of the Transmit Diversity effects 3dB increase of the signal strength Additional up to 2.9dB diversity gain for un-correlated fast fading:
Diversity gains are maximum in dense urban because there are a lot of scatterers Diversity gains are reduced in rural because we have Line of Sight propagation

Self-interference due to the artificial increase of the delay spread


Environment Dense Urban Sub-Urban Rural Fading Profile
TU3

Power increase
3dB

Diversity gain
2.9dB

Total TxDiv gain

5.9dB 4.6dB 4dB

TU50

3dB

1.6dB

RA100

3dB

1dB

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 292

2.10.1 Antenna Diversity

2.10.1.12 Diversity systems in Mobile Radio Networks


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

293

Two diversity systems are used in Mobile Radio Networks :


Space Diversity
horizontal vertical

dH RXA RXB TXA Polarization Diversity

dH TXB dv TXA

+45

-45

+45

-45

RXA RXB
Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

TXA TXB
All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 293

TXB

2.10.1 Antenna Diversity

2.10.1.13 Space Diversity Systems


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

294

Diversity gain depends on spatial separation of antennas


Horizontal separation (e.g. Roof Top) Vertical separation (e.g. Mast)
RXA dV dH RXA RXB RXB

dH = 20 15 GSM900 = 6m GSM1800 = 3m
Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

For Optimum Diversity Gain


dV GSM900 GSM1800 = = 4.5m = 2.25m

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 294

2.10.1 Antenna Diversity

2.10.1.14 Space Diversity - General Rules


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

295

The larger the separation the higher the diversity gain Prefer horizontal separation (more effective) d The higher the antenna the higher the required h separation, rule: d > h/10 Highest diversity gain from the "broadside Select orientation of diversity setup according to orientation of cell / traffic

Optimum diversity Gain

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 295

2.10.1 Antenna Diversity

2.10.1.15 Achievable Diversity Gain


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

296

Depends on fading conditions


Varies in between 2.5 - 6dB Higher diversity gain in areas with multipath propagation (urban and suburban areas)

General rule: consider diversity gain with 3dB in the link budget

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 296

2.10.1 Antenna Diversity

2.10.1.16 Polarization Diversity


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

297

Diversity gain in using orthogonal orientated antennas

Horizontal / vertical polarization: Hor/Ver Antenna

Polarization of +/- 45: cross polarized antenna or Slant antenna

RXA RXB

+45 45 RXA RXB

Big Advantage: Only one panel antenna is required to profit from diversity gain using this configuration

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 297

2.10.1 Antenna Diversity

2.10.1.17 Principle of Polarization Diversity


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

298

multipathpropagation reflection, diffraction

reception with a hor / ver polarised antenna

EV EH

Diversity Gain G = f( , )

EX1
Ex2 or Eh

reception with a X-polarised antenna

EX2

Ex1 or Ev

Time [sec]

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

correlation coeficient (0.7) difference in signal level


---> diversity gain with dual polarized antennas depends on : , and the orientation of the sending and receiving antenna To achieve low correlation and low differences in signal level, reflection and diffraction under multipath condition is necessary. ----> In rural areas neglectible diversity gain can be expected from polarization diversity.

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 298

2.10.1 Antenna Diversity

2.10.1.18 Air Combining


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

299

Features
only one TX per antenna combining signals "on air" and not in a combiner 3dB combiner loss can be saved to increase coverage

Can be realized with


TX1 TX2 two vertical polarized antennas one cross polarized panel antenna

TX1

TX2

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

The idea of air combining is to combine transmitted signals in the air and not with an internal combiner, in order to save combining losses. Thus the maximum achievable coverage range will be increased. Air combining can be realized with

two sector or omni antennas one cross polar antenna transmitting different carriers on +/-45 .

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 299

2.10.1 Antenna Diversity

2.10.1.19 Air Combining with Polarization Diversity


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

300

One antenna system


cross polarized antennas recommended for urban/suburban area (less space req.)

1 TRX or

2 TRX

V DUPL TX RXA

H BF RXB DUPL DUPL

TX1 RX1 TX2 RX2 RX2D RX1D Air combining Recommended for Evolium BTS

No Air combining Bandfilter if Decoupling too low

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 300

2.10.1 Antenna Diversity

2.10.1.20 Air Combining with Space Diversity


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

301

Two antenna system


Vertical or horizontal spacing (recommended for rural area) or or RXA RXB RXA RXB TX TX

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 301

2.10.1 Antenna Diversity

2.10.1.21 Decoupling of Signal Branches


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

302

One antenna system: TX / RX decoupling cannot be achieved by spatial separation Decoupling between both polarization branches needs to be sufficiently high to avoid
blocking problems intermodulation problems

Required decoupling values


G2 BTS: Evolium A9100 BTS: 30 dB 25dB (Integrated duplexer Anx)

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 302

2.10.1 Antenna Diversity

2.10.1.22 Cross Polarized or Hor/Ver Antenna? (1)


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

303

Receiving Application
same diversity gain for cross polarized and hor/ver antennas in urban and suburban area polarization diversity gain equal to space diversity gain (2.5 - 6dB) negligible polarization diversity gain in rural areas (not recommended) accordingly consider polarization diversity gain with 3dB in the link budget

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 303

2.10.1 Antenna Diversity

2.10.1.23 Cross Polarized or Hor/Ver Antenna? (2)


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

304

Transmission Application: Air combining


3dB loss when transmitting horizontal/vertical polarized (use of combiner) 1-2dB losses when transmitting at 45 (optimum antenna is straighten vertically) Air combining only recommended with cross polarized antenna

3dB

2dB

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 304

2.10.1 Antenna Diversity

2.10.1.24 Conclusion on Antenna Diversity


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

305

Rural Areas
installation space not limited apply Space Diversity (higher gain)

Urban and Suburban Area


apply space or polarization diversity use cross polarized antennas for air combining

Diversity Gain
consider diversity gain in link budget with 3dB

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 305

2.10. Coveradge Improvement

2.10.2 Repeater Systems


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

306

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 306

2.10.2 Repeater Systems

2.10.2.1 Repeater Application


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

307

repeater

BTS (donor cell)

area covered by repeater

original service area

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 307

2.10.2 Repeater Systems

2.10.2.2 Repeater Block Diagram


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

308

Required Isolation > 7090 dB

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

A repeater is a bi-directional amplifier. It receives the downlink signal from the BTS, amplifies it and transmits the signal to the mobile. In the uplink direction, the signal of the mobile is received, amplified and transmitted to the BTS.

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 308

2.10.2 Repeater Systems

2.10.2.3 Repeater Applications (2)


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

309

Coverage Improvement of Cells (Cell Enhancer)


removal of coverage holes caused by
topography (hills, ravines, ...) man made obstacles

Provision of tunnel coverage


street, railway tunnels underground stations

Provision of indoor coverage at places of low additional traffic

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 309

2.10.2 Repeater Systems

2.10.2.4 Repeater Types


RNE Fundamentals 1 - - 310

Channel selective repeaters


high selectivity of certain channels high traffic areas, small cell sizes

Broad band repeaters


low cost solution for low traffic areas (rural environment) medium to high repeater gain

Band selective repeaters


adjustment to operators frequency band no (accidental) usage by competitors

Personal repeaters
low gain broad band indoor coverage improvement for certain rooms

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 310

2.10.2 Repeater Systems

2.10.2.5 Repeater for Tunnel Coverage


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

311

Choice of repeater type due to


Antenna to donor cell

tunnel dimensions wall materials

feeding by
directional antennas leaky feeder cables

long tunnels
Radiating cable Repeater

chains of several repeaters fiber optic backbone for repeater feeding

Tunnel

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 311

2.10.2 Repeater Systems

2.10.2.4 Repeater for Indoor coverage


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

312

For smaller buildings


Compensation for wall losses, window losses (heat insulated windows) Low cost personal repeaters installed in certain rooms
Personal repeater

For larger buildings (shopping malls, convention centers, sport centers)


multispot transmission using
co-axial distribution network fiber-optic distribution network
Antenna to donor cell Master unit

Remote units

Fiber optic distribution Radiating cable

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 312

2.10.2 Repeater Systems

2.10.2.5 Planning Aspects


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

313

Repeater does not provide additional traffic capacity


risk of blocking if additional coverage area catches more traffic possible carrier upgrading required

Repeater causes additional signal delay


delay: 4..8s max. cell range of 35 km reduced by 1 to 2km special care needed for total delay of repeater chain! delayed signal and original signal could cause outage in urban environment if total delay exceeds 16 ... 22s

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 313

2.10.2 Repeater Systems

2.10.2.6 Repeater Gain Limitation (1)


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

314

Intermodulation products should be low


when amplifier reaches saturation point, intermodulation products go up

Signal to noise ratio should be high


when amplifier reaches saturation point, signal to noise ratio is getting worse

Antenna isolation between transmission and receiving antenna should be high


if signal feedback from transmission antenna to receiving antenna is too high, amplifier goes into saturation

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 314

2.10.2 Repeater Systems

2.10.2.7 Repeater Gain Limitation (2)


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

315

s Repeater gain limited by antenna isolation: GRepeater < IDonor, Repeater - M Pin M (Margin) ~ 12 dB gain 78 dB Pout

Pback = Pin - 12 dB

isolation 90 dB

Measure isolation after installation

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

I = G Amplifier + M arg in

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 315

2.10.2 Repeater Systems

2.10.2.8 Intermodulation Products


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

316

A Non-linear system
produces higher-order intermodulation products as soon as output power reaches the saturation point

Parameter
1 dB compression point 3rd order intercept point (ICP3) Intermodulation reduction (IMR) Amplifier back-off

GSM900/GSM1800 requirements
IM products -36 dBm or IM distance > 70 dBc whichever is higher

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

Each amplifier has a limited linear operation range. In the linear range the input power is amplified by the amplification factor v. But this is only valid until a certain maximum input power. As soon as you feed the amplifier with too high input power the input signal will less and less amplified. The point were the degradation from the specified amplification is 1dB is called the one dB compression point. Lower amplification is one effect when you operate an amplifier in the non linear region, another effect which can cause even worse problems is the intermodulation. Especially the 3rd order intermodulation product (2f1+f2) is very significant. The amplifier produces interfering signals based on available frequencies (f1 and f2). dbc = is the power of one signal referenced to a carrier signal

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 316

2.10.2 Repeater Systems

2.10.2.9 Repeater Link Budget


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

317

Uplink Loss = Downlink Loss Uplink Gain = Downlink Gain


Downlink Path Received power at repeater Link antenna gain Cable loss Repeater input power Repeater gain Repeater output power Cable loss Repeater antenna gain EIRP Unit dBm dBi dB dBm dB dBm dB dBi dBm Value -65 +19 -2 -48 +78 30 -2 +18 46

Different gains may be needed in Up- and Downlink if the sensitivity of the repeater is worse than the sensitivity of the BTS

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 317

2.10.2 Repeater Systems

2.10.2.10 High Power TRXs


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

318

High Power TRXs: solution for coverage improvement HP must be used together with TMA: due to unbalanced Link Budget A9100 BTS supports
High Power TRX Medium Power TRX type is chosen by:
environment conditions required data throughput (GPRS/EDGE)
TX power of EVOLIUM Evolution step 2 TRX :
Frequency band GSM 900 HP GSM 1800 HP TX output power, GMSK 60 W = 47.8 dBm 60 W = 47.8 dBm TX output power, 8-PSK (EDGE) 25 W = 44.0 dBm 25 W = 44.0 dBm

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 318

2.10.2 Repeater Systems

2.10.2.13 3x6 TRXs High Power Configuration


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

319

Configuration made with EVOLIUM A9100 Base Station Obs:


All TRX are HP The configuration is using cell split feature
ANc Cabinet1 (High power 3x3TRX)
Combining No-combining Combining

ANc
No-combining Combining

ANc
No-combining

HPTRX1 HPTRX 2 MPTRX 3

HPTRX1 HPTRX 2 MPTRX 3

HPTRX1 HPTRX 2 MPTRX 3

Cabinet2 (High power 3x3TRX)

ANc
Combining No-combining Combining

ANc
No-combining Combining

ANc
No-combining

HPTRX1 HPTRX 2 MPTRX 3

HPTRX1 HPTRX 2 MPTRX 3

HPTRX1 HPTRX 2 MPTRX 3

Sector1: 1x6 TRX

Sector2: 1x6 TRX

Sector3: 1x6 TRX

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 319

2.10.2 Repeater Systems

2.10.2.14 Mixed TRX Configuration


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

320

BTS EVOLIUM supports a mix of:


EVOLIUM TRX (TRE) - supports GSM/GPRS and EDGE EVOLIUM Evolution step 2 TRX (TRA) with Medium Power EVOLIUM Evolution step 2 TRX (TRA) with High Power
Hardware configuration

T R A HP

T R A MP

T R E

T R E

Logical cell TRX1 (BCCH) TRX2 (1 SDCCH) TRX3 TRX4

Allocation Packet Voice

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 320

RNE Fundamentals -

1- -

321

3 Traffic & Frequency Planning

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 321

3 Fraffic & Frequency Planning

3.1 Traffic Caspacity


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

322

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 322

3.1 Traffic Capacity

3.1.1 Telephone System


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

323

blocked call attempts

subscriber 1 2 3 4 automatic switch line to PSTN sub 3 sub 4 time observation period, e.g. main busy hour (MBH) "offered" traffic = # of calls arriving in MBH mean holding time = 1/ [Erlang] sub 1 sub 2

Parameters: : : 1/: arrival rate [1/h] release rate [1/h] mean holding time [sec]

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 323

3.1 Traffic Capacity

3.1.2 Offered Traffic and Traffic Capacity


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

324

Offered Traffic ()

Loss System (n slots)

Handled Traffic (T) T=-R

Rejected Traffic (R)

Handled Traffic, Traffic Capacity: T Blocking Probability, Grade of Service (GoS): pblock = R / System load: = T / n, i.e. T < n

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 324

3.1 Traffic Capacity

3.1.3 Definition of Erlang


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

325

w ERLANG : Unit used to quantify traffic

T=

(resource usage duration)/ (total observation duration) [ERLANG]

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 325

3.1 Traffic Capacity

3.1.4 Call Mix and Erlang Calculation


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

326

w CALL MIX EXAMPLE

350 call/hour 3 LU/call TCH duration : 85 sec SDCCH duration : 4,5 sec
w ERLANG COMPUTATION

TCH = (350 * 85)/3600 = 8,26 ERLANG SDCCH = [ (350 + 350*3) * 4,5 ] / 3600 = 1.75 ERLANG

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 326

3.1 Traffic Capacity

3.1.5 ERLANG B LAW


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

327

ERLANG B LAW
w Relationship between

Offered traffic Number of resources Blocking rate

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 327

3.1 Traffic Capacity

3.1.5 ERLANG B LAW (2)


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

328

call request arrival rate (and leaving) is not stable


number of resources = average number of requests mean duration is sometime not sufficent => probability of blocking

=> Erlang B law


Pblock : blocking probability N : number of resources E : offered traffic [Erlang] Calculated with Excel - Makro or Table

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 328

3.1 Traffic Capacity

3.1.6 Erlangs Formula


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

329

How to calculate the traffic capacity T? Basics: Markov Chain (queue statistics)

p0

p1
2

p2
3

pi
n

pn

no call establishe d

i channels occupied

all channels occupied

Calculation of the blocking probability using Erlangs formula (Erlang B statistics):


n p block = n! i i = 0 i!
n

Varation of until pblock reached: T

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 329

3.1 Traffic Capacity

3.1.7 Blocking Probability (Erlang B)


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

330

Nr. of channels 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 30 35 40 45 50

Blocking Probability Erlang B 0.1% 0.2% 0.5% 0.001 0.046 0.194 0.439 0.762 1.146 1.579 2.051 2.557 3.092 3.651 4.231 4.831 5.446 6.077 6.721 7.378 8.046 8.724 9.411 10.108 10.812 11.524 12.243 12.969 16.684 20.517 24.444 28.447 32.512 0.002 0.065 0.249 0.535 0.900 1.325 1.798 2.311 2.855 3.427 4.022 4.637 5.270 5.919 6.582 7.258 7.946 8.644 9.351 10.068 10.793 11.525 12.265 13.011 13.763 17.606 21.559 25.599 29.708 33.876 0.005 0.105 0.349 0.701 1.132 1.622 2.157 2.730 3.333 3.961 4.610 5.279 5.964 6.663 7.376 8.099 8.834 9.578 10.331 11.092 11.860 12.635 13.416 14.204 14.997 19.034 23.169 27.382 31.656 35.982

1% 0.010 0.153 0.455 0.869 1.361 1.909 2.501 3.128 3.783 4.461 5.160 5.876 6.607 7.352 8.108 8.875 9.652 10.437 11.230 12.031 12.838 13.651 14.470 15.295 16.125 20.337 24.638 29.007 33.432 37.901

2% 0.020 0.223 0.602 1.092 1.657 2.276 2.935 3.627 4.345 5.084 5.842 6.615 7.402 8.200 9.010 9.828 10.656 11.491 12.333 13.182 14.036 14.896 15.761 16.631 17.505 21.932 26.435 30.997 35.607 40.255

3% 0.031 0.282 0.715 1.259 1.875 2.543 3.250 3.987 4.748 5.529 6.328 7.141 7.967 8.803 9.650 10.505 11.368 12.238 13.115 13.997 14.885 15.778 16.675 17.577 18.483 23.062 27.711 32.412 37.155 41.933

4% 0.042 0.333 0.812 1.399 2.057 2.765 3.509 4.283 5.080 5.895 6.727 7.573 8.430 9.298 10.174 11.059 11.952 12.850 13.755 14.665 15.581 16.500 17.425 18.353 19.284 23.990 28.758 33.575 38.430 43.316

5% 0.053 0.381 0.899 1.525 2.218 2.960 3.738 4.543 5.370 6.216 7.076 7.950 8.835 9.730 10.633 11.544 12.461 13.385 14.315 15.249 16.189 17.132 18.080 19.031 19.985 24.802 29.677 34.596 39.550 44.533

10% 0.111 0.595 1.271 2.045 2.881 3.758 4.666 5.597 6.546 7.511 8.487 9.474 10.470 11.473 12.484 13.500 14.522 15.548 16.579 17.613 18.651 19.692 20.737 21.784 22.833 28.113 33.434 38.787 44.165 49.562

15% 0.176 0.796 1.602 2.501 3.454 4.445 5.461 6.498 7.551 8.616 9.691 10.776 11.867 12.965 14.068 15.176 16.289 17.405 18.525 19.647 20.773 21.901 23.031 24.164 25.298 30.995 36.723 42.475 48.245 54.029

20% 0.250 1.000 1.930 2.945 4.010 5.109 6.230 7.369 8.522 9.685 10.857 12.036 13.222 14.413 15.608 16.807 18.010 19.216 20.424 21.635 22.848 24.064 25.281 26.499 27.720 33.840 39.985 46.147 52.322 58.508

50% 1.000 2.732 4.591 6.501 8.437 10.389 12.351 14.320 16.294 18.273 20.254 22.238 24.224 26.212 28.201 30.191 32.182 34.173 36.166 38.159 40.153 42.147 44.142 46.137 48.132 58.113 68.099 78.088 88.079 98.072

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 330

3.1 Traffic Capacity

3.1.8 BTS Traffic Capacity (Full Rate)


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

331

Number of TRX SDCCH 1 4 2 8 3 8 4 16 5 16 6 24 7 24 8 32

TCH 7 14 22 29 37 44 52 59

Speech Traffic (Erlang 1% 2% 2.501 2.935 7.352 8.2 13.651 14.896 19.487 21.039 26.379 28.254 32.543 34.682 39.7 42.124 46.039 48.7

B) 5% 3.738 9.73 17.132 23.833 31.64 38.557 46.533 53.559

Signalling Traffic (Erlang B) 0.1% 0.2% 0.5% 0.439 0.535 0.701 2.051 2.311 2.73 2.051 2.311 2.73 6.721 7.258 8.099 6.721 7.258 8.099 12.243 13.011 14.204 12.243 13.011 14.204 18.205 19.176 20.678

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 331

3 Fraffic & Frequency Planning

3.2 Network Evolution


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

332

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 332

3.2 Network Evolution

3.2.1 Network Evolution - Capacity Approach (1)


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

333

The roll out of a network is dedicated to provide coverage Network design changes rapidly Planning method must be flexible and fast (group method) Manual frequency planning possible

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 333

3.2 Network Evolution

3.2.2 Network Evolution - Capacity Approach (2)


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

334

With the growing amount of subscribers, the need for more installed capacity is rising Possible Solutions:
Installing more TRXs on the existing BTS Implementing additional sites

Discussion!

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

Also new services like GPRS are demanding more capacity

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 334

3.2 Network Evolution

3.2.3 Network Evolution - Capacity Approach (3)


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

335

Installing more TRXs - Advantages


No site search/acquisition process No additional sites to rent (saves cost) Trunking efficiency Higher capacity per cell

Installing more TRXs - Disadvantages


More antennas on roof top (Air combining) Additional losses if WBC has to be used
Less (indoor) coverage

More frequencies per site needed Tighter reuse necessary decreasing quality

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

Trunking efficiency 1TRX 2TRX 3TRX 4TRX 5TRX 6TRX 7TRX . 2.7 Erl. 8.2 Erl 14.9 Erl 21.0 Erl 28.3 Erl 34.7 Erl 42.1 Erl +2.7 Erl +5.3 Erl (+1 Signalling TS) +6.7 Erl +6.1 Erl (+1 Signalling TS) +7.3 Erl +6.4 Erl (+1 Signalling TS) +7.4 Erl

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 335

3.2 Network Evolution

3.2.4 Network Evolution - Capacity Approach (4)


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

336

Implementing additional sites - Advantages


Reuse can remain the same (smaller cell sizes) Needs less frequency spectrum
higher spectrum efficiency

Implementing additional sites - Disadvantages


Additional site cost (rent) Re-design of old cells necessary (often not done)

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 336

3 Fraffic & Frequency Planning

3.3 Cell Structures


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

337

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 337

3.3 Cell Structures

3.3.1 Cell Structures and Quality


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

338

Frequency re-use in cellular radio networks


allow efficient usage of the frequency spectrum but causes interference

Interdependence of
Cell size Cluster size Re-use distance Interference level Network Quality

interferer region

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 338

3.3 Cell Structures

3.3.2 Cell Re-use Cluster (Omni Sites) (1)


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

339

2 7 6 R D 1

3 4 5 7 6 2 1 5 3 4

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 339

3.3 Cell Structures

3.3.2 Cell Re-use Cluster (Omni Sites)(2)


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

340

1 4 7 10 11 5

2 6 8 12

3 D 9

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 340

3.3 Cell Structures

3.3.4 Cell Re-use Cluster (Sector Site) (1)


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

341

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 341

3.3 Cell Structures

3.3.5 4x3 Cell Re-use Cluster (Sector Site) (2)


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

342

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 342

3.3 Cell Structures

3.3.6 Irregular (Real) Cell Shapes


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

343

6
Coverage Hole

Network Border

Island

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 343

3 Fraffic & Frequency Planning

3.4 Frequency Reuse


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

344

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 344

3.4 Frequency Reuse

3.4.1 GSM Frequency Spectrum


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

345

GSM 900
DL: 935-960 MHz UL: 890-915 MHz 200 kHz channel spacing 124 channels ARFCN 1 - 124

E-GSM
DL: 925-935 MHz UL: 880-890 MHz 200 kHz channel spacing Additional 50 channels ARFCN 0, 975 - 1023 200 kHz channel spacing 124 channels

GSM 850
DL: 869-894 MHz ARFCN: 128 - 251 UL: 824-849 MHz

GSM 1800
DL: 1805-1880 MHz UL: 1710-1785 MHz 200 kHz channel spacing 374 channels ARFCN 512 - 885

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 345

3.4 Frequency Reuse

3.4.2 Impact of limited Frequency Spectrum


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

346

Bandwidth is an expensive resource Best usage necessary Efficient planning necessary to contain good QoS when the traffic in the network is increasing
smaller reuse Multiple reuse pattern (MRP) usage implementation of concentric cells / microcells/dual band implementation of Frequency Hopping Baseband Synthezised

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 346

3.4 Frequency Reuse

3.4.3 What is frequency reuse?


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

347

As the GSM spectrum is limited, frequencies have to be reused to provide enough capacity The more often a frequency is reused within a certain amount of cells, the smaller the frequency reuse Aim: Minimizing the frequency reuse for providing more capacity REUSE CLUSTER: Area including cells which do not reuse the same frequency (or frequency group)

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 347

3.4 Frequency Reuse

3.4.4 RCS and ARCS (1)


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

348

Reuse Cluster Size - RCS


If all cells within the reuse cluster have the same amount of TRXs, the reuse per TRX layer can be calculated:

RCS =

B # TRX / cell

Average Reuse Cluster Size - ARCS


If the cells are different equiped, the average number of TRXs has to be used for calculating the average reuse cluster size:

ARCS =

B # TRX / cell

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 348

3.4 Frequency Reuse

3.4.5 RCS and ARCS (2)


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

349

The ARCS is giving the average reuse of the network when using the whole bandwidth and all TRXs per cell E.g: if we want to have the reuse of all non hopping TCH TRXs, we have to use the dedicated bandwidth and the average number of non hopping TCH TRXs per cell to get the ARCS of this layer type. Each cell has only one BCCH. Therefore the BCCH reuse is an RCS and not an ARCS!

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 349

3.4 Frequency Reuse

3.4.6 Reuse Cluster Size (1)


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

350

Sectorized sites 4 sites per reuse cluster 3 cells per site REUSE Cluster Size: 4X3 =12
1 3 1 3 7 9 8 2 4 6 10 12 11 5 7 9 8 2 4 6 10 12 11 5

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 350

3.4 Frequency Reuse

3.4.7 Reuse Cluster Size (2)


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

351

Sectorized sites 3 sites per reuse cluster 3 cells per site REUSE Cluster Size 3X3 = 9
1 3 7 9 8 2 4 6 1 3 7 9 8 2 4 6 5 5

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 351

3.4 Frequency Reuse

3.4.8 Reuse Distance


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

352

cell A

reus ed ist an ce

D = f R 3 RCS
1 f = 2 3 omnidirectional cells three - sectorized cells
interferer region cell B

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

In theory reuse distance and reuse shouldnt be dependent. In reality, when the cells are not well designed: bigger cell overlapp =>higher frequency reuse, smaller reuse distance

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 352

3.4 Frequency Reuse

3.4.9 Frequency Reuse Distance


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

353

D = distance between cell sites with the same frequencies R = service radius of a cell B = number of frequencies in total bandwidth RCS = reuse cluster size, i.e. one cell uses B/RCS frequencies In hexagonal cell geometry: D/R = f omni cells: f=1; sector cells: f=2/3 3 RCS

Examples (omni): RCS = 7: D/R = 4.6 RCS = 9: D/R = 5.2 RCS =12: D/R = 6.0

Received Power Frec Frec, A Frec, B

site A

C/I

site B

distance

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 353

3.4 Frequency Reuse

3.4.10 Frequency Reuse: Example


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

354

No sectorization 7 cells per cluster


BCCH RCS = 7

BCCH RCS

TCH Reuse: Depending on BW and Number of installed TRXs per cell Example:
B= 26 4TRXs per cell

interferer region

TCH RCS

TCH RCS =

26 7 BCCH 1Guard =6 3
All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

BCCH reuse is always RCS, because we dont need to use an average (always one BCCH per cell). Omni cells To calculate the TCH reuse in the example, the BCCH RCS is subtracted from the bandwidth B and the average number of TCH TRX per cell is 4 minus 1 BCCH = 3

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 354

3 Fraffic & Frequency Planning

3.5 Cell Planning


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

355

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 355

3.5 Cell Planning

3.5.1 Cell Planning - Frequency Planning (1)


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

356

Can frequency planning be seen independently from cell planning?

Discussion

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 356

3.5 Cell Planning

3.5.2 Cell Planning - Frequency Planning (2)


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

357

Bad cell planning


Island coverage Big overlap areas disturbing the reuse pattern bigger reuse necessary

Good cell planning


Sharp cell borders Small overlap areas good containment of frequency tighter reuse possible

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 357

3.5 Cell Planning

3.5.3 Influencing Factors on Frequency Reuse Distance


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

358

Topography
Hilly terrain Usage of natural obstacles to define sharp cell borders tighter frequency reuse possible Flat terrain Achieveable reuse much more dependent on the accurate cell design

Morphology
Water City low attenuation high attenuation high reuse distance low reuse distance

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 358

3.5 Cell Planning

3.5.4 Conclusion
RNE Fundamentals 1- -

359

In cellular mobile networks, the frequency reuse pattern has a direct influence on the interference and hence the network quality Regular hexagonal patterns allow the deduction of engineering formulas In real networks, cell sizes and shapes are irregular due to
Variation in traffic density Topography Land usage

Engineering formulas allow the assessment of the network quality and worstcase considerations, but the real situation must be proved!

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 359

3.5 Cell Planning

3.5.5 Examples for different frequency reuses


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

360

Big city in the south of Africa:


BCCH reuse 26
Irregular cell design Mixed morphology Lots of water Flat terrain plus some high sites

Big city in eastern Europe


BCCH reuse 12
Regular cell design Flat area Only urban environment

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 360

3 Fraffic & Frequency Planning

3.6 Interference Probability


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

361

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 361

3.6 Interference Probability

3.6.1 Interference Theory (1)


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

362

C/I restrictions
9dB for co-channel interference -9 dB for adjacent channel interference

P rec Prec, A

Received Power

Prec, B

C/ I

dista nce

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

C/I is the difference between the two received power lines when shifting the two transmitters towards each other, the area where the C/I is > 9dB shrinks At a certain distance of the two transmitters, the C/I can never fulfil the GSM criteria -> minimum site distance. It has to be kept in mind, that of course other cells will be inbetween two cells transmitting at the same frequency!

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 362

3.6 Interference Probability

3.6.2 Interference Theory (2)


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

363

Interference probability
C/Imed is the calculated carrier to interference ratio at a certain location (pixel)
Probability density function [%]
5,0% 4,0% 3,0% 2,0% 1,0% 0,0% C/Ithr C/Imed C/I [dB] Margin

ARCS 6.5..9.0 7.0..9.5 8.5..11.0 12.0..16.0

Pint[%] 10 7.5 5.0 2.5

Interferer probability [%]

100% 3.6 Interference Probability 80% 60% 40% 20% 0% -20 -15 -10 -5 0 5 10 15 20 C/I - C/Ithr[dB]

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

The marked area left of C/Ithr is the area of interference. Although the received level is above the threshold, there is a certain probability to get interference because of the standard deviation of the received signal.

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 363

3.6 Interference Probability

3.6.3 CPDF - Cumulative Probability Density Function


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

364

Pint = P ( C/I < C/I thr) P int 1 0,9 0,8 0,7 0,6 0,5 0,4 0,3 0,2 0,1 0

CPDF - Cumulative Probability Density Function

Distance from serving cell

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 364

3.6 Interference Probability

3.6.4 Interference Probability dependent on Average Reuse


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

365

ARCS = Pint [%] 12 9 6 3 0 5 10 15

# of frequencies in used bandwidth average # of carriers per cell


Examples: Pint[%] ARCS 10 6.5...9 7.5 7...9.5 5 8.5...11 2.5 12...16

20

25

ARCS

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 365

3 Fraffic & Frequency Planning

3.7 Carrier Types


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

366

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 366

3.7 Carrier Types

3.7.1 Carrier Types - BCCH carrier


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

367

BCCH frequency is on air all the time If there is no traffic/signaling on TS 1 to 7 dummy bursts are transmitted PC (Power Control) and DTX (Discontinuous Transmission) are not allowed Important for measurements of the mobile

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

The BCCH frequency must be transmitted with full power all the time! Otherwise the measurements of the neighborcell levels would be useless.

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 367

3.7 Carrier Types

3.7.2 Carrier Types - TCH carrier


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

368

PC allowed and recommended for UL and DL


Reduction of transmit power according to the actual path loss Careful parameter tuning for DL necessary

DTX allowed and recommended for UL and DL


Discontinuous Transmission If there is no speech, nothing is transmitted Generation of comfort noise at receiving mobile

TCH not in use no signal is transmitted Special case: Concentric cells


Different re-uses for inner and outer zone are possible

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

PC and DTX are reducing the overall interference in the network. As a TCH is not transmitting anything when not in use, the interference level is strongly related to the traffic on the interfereing cells.

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 368

3 Fraffic & Frequency Planning

3.8 Multiple Reuse Pattern MRP


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

369

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 369

3.8 Multiple reuse pattern

3.8.1 Meaning of multiple reuse pattern (1)


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

370

For different types of carriers, different interference potential is expected As the BCCH carrier has the highest interferer potential because of being on air all the time and the BCCH channel itself is accepting only low interference, the REUSE on the BCCH layer is higher then on other layers TCH layers can be planned with a smaller REUSE Inner zones of concentric cells are able to deal with the smallest reuse in non hopping networks

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 370

3.8 Multiple reuse pattern

3.8.2 Meaning of multiple reuse pattern (2)


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

371

REUSE clusters for


INNER ZONE layer TCH layer

BCCH layer

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

When applying different reuses in the different cell layers, of course separated bands are necessary!

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 371

3.8 Multiple reuse pattern

3.8.3 GSM restrictions


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

372

Intra site minimum channel spacing 2 Intra cell minimum channel spacing 2 (ETSI recommends 3, but with Alcatel EVOLIUM capabilities this value can be set to 2)
constrains:
Uplink power control enabled Intra cell interference handover enabled

fA1,fA2,fA3,...

Frequencies fAx,fBx,fCx, must have at least 2 channels spacing Frequencies fx1,fx2,fx3, must have at least 3 channels spacing

fC

,f C3 2 f ,C 1

,...

fB

1 ,f B2 ,

fB

3 ,.

..
All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

The Intra cell minimum channel spacing of 3 is given by the combiner in the BTS, to avaoid IM problems Important remark: the whole training is compliant to the co-cell constraint of 3 channels ; this is more restrictive than the BTS capability of filtering the channels on frequency n*200 kHz Acc to A.Krause: for Evolium BTS standard equipped with WBC the co-cell constraint can be only 2 channels. (A channel spacing of 2 was tested @Vodacom in 1999 but the result was not better than with channel spacing of 3.)

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 372

3 Fraffic & Frequency Planning

3.9 Intermodulation
RNE Fundamentals 1- -

373

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 373

3.9 Intermodulation

3.9.1 Intermodulation problems (1)


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

374

IM Products GSM900
In a GSM 900 system intermodulation products of 3rd and 5th order can cause interference
2 * f1,t f2,t = f2,r / 2 * f2,t f1,t = f1,r 3 * f1,t 2 * f2,t = f2,r / 3 * f2,t 2 * f1,t = f1,r

Frequency planning must avoid fulfilling these equations Both frequencies must be on the same duplexer To avoid intra band IM inside GSM900 the following frequency separations shall be avoided:
75/112/113 channels

IM5

IM3

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

Info from techn. dept: If a WBC has to be used because of the number of TRXs, the output power is not high enough to cause problems. -> No intermodulation problems .

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 374

3.9 Intermodulation

3.9.2 Intermodulation problems (2)


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

375

IM Products GSM1800
In a GSM 1800 system, only intermodulation products of 3rd order can cause measurable interference 2 * f1,t f2,t = f2,r / 2 * f2,t f1,t = f1,r Frequency separations to be avoided
237/238 channels

IM Products Dual Band (GSM900/GSM1800)


f1800,t f900,t = f900,r Decoupling between the GSM 1800 TX path and the GSM 900 RX path is less than 30 dB (e.g. same antenna used!)

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 375

3.9 Intermodulation

3.9.3 Intermodulation problems (3) - Summary


RNE Fundamentals INSIDE Problem: IM3 / IM5 carrier/antenna G3 900 1 G3 900 2 ore more G3 1800 1 G3 1800 2 or more carrier/antenna G2 900 w/o dupl 1 2 or more G2 900 with dupl 1 2 or more G2 1800 w/o dupl 1 2 or more G2 1800 with dupl 1 2 2
Problem can be solved by hopping over more than 10 frequencies

1- -

376

restriction no 112/113 (IM3) and 75 (IM5) no 237/238 (IM3) no IM5 quality degradation measurable no no no 112/113 (IM3) and 75 (IM5) no no no dud2(high Power) -> no dupd -> 237/238

OUTSIDE Problem: Dual Band Colocated BTSs G3 900 G2/G3 1800 G2 900 w/o dupl G2 900 with dupl G2/G3 1800 G2/G3 1800

Problem only for non hopping and BCCH carriers f(1800,t) - f(900,t) = f(900,r) no f(1800,t) - f(900,t) = f(900,r)

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

Caution: SFH doesnt bring additional benefits when hopping over more than 4 frequencies

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 376

3.9 Intermodulation

3.9.4 Treating neighbor cells


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

377

Cells, which are not declared as neighbor cells but are located in the neighborhood may use adjacent frequencies if it is not avoidable, but no co channel frequencies Cells which are declared as neighbors, thus have HO relationships, must not use co or adjacent frequencies
If an adjacent frequency is used, the HO will be risky and at least audible by the user

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 377

3.9 Intermodulation

3.9.5 Where can I find neighbor cells?


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

378

At the OMC-R for each cell a list of neighbor cells is defined Maximum number of neighbors: 32 The list of neighbors and their frequencies is transmitted to the mobile to be able to perform measurements on these frequencies In case of a HO cause, the HO will be performed towards the best neighbor

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 378

3 Fraffic & Frequency Planning

3.10 Manual Frequency Planning


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

379

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 379

3.10 Manual Frequency Planning

3.10.1 Frequency planning (1)


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

380

No fixed method Free frequency assignment possible, but very time consuming for larger networks For easy and fast frequency planning: use group assignment Example: 18 channels, 2TRX per cell ARCS 9

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 380

3.10 Manual Frequency Planning

3.10.2 Frequency planning (2)


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

381

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
A1 B1 A2 B2 A3 B3 A4 B4 A5

GSM restrictions are automatically fulfilled, if on one site only groups A* or only B* are used

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 381

3.10 Manual Frequency Planning

3.10.3 Exercise: Manual frequency planning (1)


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

382

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

A1 A2 B4 B2 A1 A2 A3 A4 A2 A2 A3 B1 A4 B1 B2 A5 A1 B3

A2

A5

B2 B4

B1

A3

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 382

3.10 Manual Frequency Planning

3.10.4 Exercise: Manual frequency planning (2)


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

383

A1 A2 B2 B1 B1 B4 B2 A5 A1 B3 A4 A3

A2

A5

A3 A2

B2

B4 A1 A2

B1

A4

A3

A2

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 383

3.10 Manual Frequency Planning

3.10.5 Discussion: Subdivide Frequency Band?


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

384

Any subdivision of the frequency band is reducing the spectrum efficiency! Separations should be avoided if possible! As the BCCH has to be very clean, it is nevertheless recommended to use a separated band and select a bigger reuse

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

The focus in the discussion is not the fx band splitting by fx management authorities.

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 384

3.10 Manual Frequency Planning

3.10.6 Hint for creating a future proofed frequency plan


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

385

If a frequency plan is implemented, using all available frequencies in the most efficient way, it is very difficult to implement new sites in the future! New sites would make a complete re-planning of the surrounding area or the whole frequency plan necessary To avoid replanning every time when introducing new sites, it is recommended to keep some Joker frequencies free These Joker frequencies can be used for new sites (especially BCCH TRXs) unless it is impossible to implement new sites without changing a big part of the frequency plan

New frequency plan necessary!

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 385

3.10 Manual Frequency Planning

3.10.7 Implementing a frequency plan


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

386

If only a few frequencies have to be changed, the changes can be done at the OMC-R
Disadvantage: Every cell has to be modified separately  Downtime of the cell approx. 5 minutes

If lots of changes have to be done, it is of advantage to use external tools


Since B6.2 the complete frequency plan can be uploaded from the OMC the uploaded file can be modified by the tool (A9155 PRC Generator) the the new plan is downloaded into the network and activated at once

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 386

3 Fraffic & Frequency Planning

3.11 BSCI Planning


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

387

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 387

3.11 BSIC Planning

3.11.1 BSCI allocation


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

388

Together with the frequencies the Base Transceiver Station Identity Code (BSIC) has to be planned The BSIC is to distinguish between cells using the same BCCH frequency BSIC = NCC (3bits) + BCC (3bits)
NCC Network (PLMN) Colour Code BCC - Base Transceiver Station (BTS) Colour Code

BSIC planning is supported by the A9155 (Alcatel Radio Network Planning Tool)

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 388

3.11 BSIC Planning

3.11.2 BSIC Planning Rules


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

389

The same combination BCCH/BSIC must not be used on cell influencing on each other (having a mutual interference <>0) BSIC allocation rules:
Avoid using same BCCH/BSIC combination of:
neighbours cells second order neighbour cells (the neighbours of neighbour cell (OMC limitation))

C
Neighbour Cell BCCH:24

Neighbour Cell BCCH:24 BSIC:36

A
Serving Cell BCCH:10 BSIC: any

BSIC: must NOT be 36

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 389

3.11 BSIC Planning

3.11.3 Spurious RACH


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

390

Bad BSIC planning can cause SDCCH congestion cause by the spurious RACH problem, also known as Ghost RACH This problem occurs, when a mobile sends an HO access burst to a TRX of cell A using the same frequency as a nearby cell B uses on the BCCH Both cells using the same BSIC and Training Sequence Code TSQC, the HO access burst is understood by the cell B as a RACH for call setup Therefore on cell B SDCCHs are allocated everytime a HO access burst is sent from the mobile to the cell A

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

If in cell B the BCCH and TRX 2 exchange their frequencies (BCCH gets the fx of TRX2 and TRX2 gets the fx of BCCH): no problem with spurious RACH

Cell B F1 F2 BSIC=1

Cell C

Cell A F5 F1 BSIC=1

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 390

3.11 BSIC Planning

3.11.4 Summary
RNE Fundamentals 1- -

391

For optimal usage of your frequency spectrum a good cell design is essential Use larger reuse for BCCH frequencies Use spectrum splitting only when necessary

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 391

3 Fraffic & Frequency Planning

3.12 Capacity Enhancement Techniques


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

392

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 392

3.12 Capacity Enhancement Techniques

3.12.1 Capacity enhancement by planning


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

393

Interference reduction of cells


Check of antenna type, direction and down tilt
This is a check of cell size, border and orientation

Check of proper cabling


Is TX and RX path on the same sector antenna?

Check of the frequency plan


Introduction of a better frequency plan

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 393

3.12 Capacity Enhancement Techniques

3.12.2 Capacity enhancement by adding feature


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

394

Frequency hopping
Base band hopping Synthesized frequency hopping

Concentric cells Half rate

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 394

3.12 Capacity Enhancement Techniques

3.12.3 Capacity enhancement by adding TRX


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

395

Adding TRX to existing cells Multi band cells Concentric cells

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 395

3.12 Capacity Enhancement Techniques

3.12.4 Capacity enhancement by adding cells


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

396

Adding of cells at existing site locations Adding new cell = adding new BCCH Dual band
Adding cells using another frequency band

Cell splitting
Reduction of cell size Change of one omni cell into several cells/sector cells

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 396

3.12 Capacity Enhancement Techniques

3.12.5 Capacity enhancement by adding sites


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

397

Dual band/multi band network


Adding of new sites in new frequency band

Multi layer network


Adding of new sites in another layer
E.g. adding micro cells for outdoor coverage

Indoor coverage
Adding micro cells indoor coverage Adding macro cells indoor coverage

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 397

RNE Fundamentals -

1- -

398

4 Radio Interface

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 398

4 Radio Interface

4.1 GSM Air Interface


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

399

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 399

4.1 GSM Air Interface

4.1.1 Radio Resources


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

400

Radio Spectrum Allocation

Frequency (FDMA) Carrier Frequencies (ARFCN) Cell Allocation (CA) Mobile Allocation (MA)

Time (TDMA) Timeslot 0<TN<7


FDMA TDMA ARFCN TN FN

TDMA Frames 0<FN<FN_MAX


Frequency division multiple access Time division multiple access Absolute radio frequency channel number Timeslot number Frame number

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 400

4.1 GSM Air Interface

4.1.2 GSM Transmission Principles (1)


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

401

FDMA and TDMA with 8 time slots per carrier RF frequency band
(E)GSM: GSM1800: (880) 890 ... 915 MHz Uplink (MS BS) (925) 935 ... 960 MHz Downlink (BS MS) 1710 ... 1785 MHz Uplink 1805 ... 1880 MHz Downlink

200 kHz bandwidth Number of carriers:


GSM: Flower E-GSM: Flower Flower DCS : Flower (n) (n) (n) (n) = = = =

124 (GSM); 374 (DCS); 49 (E-GSM)


MHz MHz MHz MHz with with with with 1 n 124 0 n 124 975 n 1023 512 n 885

890 + 0.2 n 890 + 0.2 n 890 + 0.2 (n -1024) 1710.2 + 0.2 (n - 512)

(E)GSM: Fupper (n) = Flower (n) + 45 MHz DCS: Fupper (n) = Flower (n) + 95 MHz

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 401

4.1 GSM Air Interface

4.1.3 GSM Transmission Principles (2)


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

402

Channel types
Traffic Channels (TCH)
Full rate Half rate

Control Channels (CCH)


Broadcast Control Channel (BCCH) Common Control Channel (CCCH) Dedicated Control Channel (DCCH)

TDMA frame cycles


26 cycle for traffic channels 51 cycle for control channels

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 402

4.1 GSM Air Interface

4.1.4 Advantages of Signal Processing


RNE Fundamentals 1 - - 403

Spectrum limitations
Operator

Bad propagation conditions

P t
Good spectrum efficiency Good transmission quality

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 403

4.1 GSM Air Interface

4.1.5 Signal Processing Chain


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

404

stealing bit and FACCH speech input speech coding error protection

interleaving

encryption

modulation

Loss Noise Interference Fading speech output speech decoding

radio channel

error correction

de-interleaving

decryption

demodulation

stealing bit and FACCH

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 404

4 Radio Interface

4.2 Channel Coding


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

405

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 405

4.2 Channel Coding

4.2.1 Speech Coding


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

406

Coding algorithm: RPE-LTP


Pre-computation RPE = Regular Pulse Excitation
Model of human voice generation

20 ms of coded speech

260 bits speech block

LTP = Long Term Prediction


Reduction of bit rate

Bit rate: 13 kBit/s

182 class 1 bits


sensitive to bit errors must be protected

78 class 2 bits
robust to bit errors

Coding at fixed network: PCM A-law Bit rate: 64 kBit/s

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 406

4.2 Channel Coding

4.2.2 Error Protection


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

407

Messages (signalling data)


184 bits

Speech (full rate)


260 bits
Class 1a
50 bits

Class 1b
132 bits

Class 2
78 bits

Fire Code
184 4 0 4

Parity check Tail bits

Cyclic code

Tail bits

5 0

132

Convolutional Code r = 1/2, K = 5


456 = 24 x 19

Convolutional Code r = 1/2, K = 5


37 8 78
= 456 = 8 x 57

456 bits in 20 ms = 22.6 kbit/s

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 407

4.2 Channel Coding

4.2.3 Interleaving and TDMA Frame Mapping


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

408

57 bits Block n (456 bits) Block n-1 (456 bits) 0123 4 5 6 7 0123 4 5 6 7

Block n+1 (456 bits) 0123 4 5 6 7


Interleaving

2 x 57 bits

.... 114 bits 114 bits 114 bits 114 bits 114 bits 114 bits 114 bits 114 bits .

.... .
Addition of stealing flags

.... 116 bits 116 bits 116 bits 116 bits 116 bits 116 bits 116 bits 116 bits .

.... .
Mapping onto bursts

.... .

burst n-3

burst n-2 burst n-1

burst n

burst n+1 burst n+2 burst n+3 burst n+4

.... .

1 time slot

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 408

4.2 Channel Coding

4.2.4 Encryption
RNE Fundamentals 1- -

409

Network
Algorithm A3
Ki Random number generator

Authenticatio n yes/no + SRES (32 bit) RAND (128 bit) RAND RAND

Mobile station
Algorithm A3
Ki

AuC IMSI Ki

SIM Card

Algorithm A8
Kc (64 bit)

Algorithm A8
Kc

Algorithm A5
original data + encrypte d data encrypte d data

Algorithm A5
+ original data

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 409

4.2 Channel Coding

4.2.5 Burst Structure


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

410

A burst contains one data "portion" of one timeslot TDMA frame: time between two bursts with same timeslot number The burst also consists of:
Guard period (GP): allows for transition and settling times Tail bits: allow for small shifts in time delay (synchronisation) Stealing flags: to indicate FACCH (control channel) data Training sequence: for equalization purposes
GP 3 tail bits

Normal Burst
TDMA frame = 4.615 ms

Data
57 bits

Training Sequence
1 26 bits 1

Data
57 bits 3 GP tail bits

stealing flags 156.25 bit periods = 0.577 ms

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 410

4.2 Channel Coding

4.2.4 Synchronisation
RNE Fundamentals 1- -

411

0 1 2 3 1 2 0 1 2
TT TT

transmitted from BTS 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 (downlink) received at BTS (uplink) received at MS (downlink)


TT 3 TS delay

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1
TT

3
RACH

1 2
non-synchronized

transmitted from MS (uplink)

synchronized

MS delay line setting

Transmitted bursts need a travelling time (TT) to the receiver For network access, the MS sends a (non-synchronized) shortened RACH burst The BSS measures the TT and generates a timing advance value TA which is transmitted to the MS

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 411

4.2 Channel Coding

4.2.5 Modulation
RNE Fundamentals 1- -

412

Gaussian minimum shift keying


Based on phase shift keying Reduction of required bandwidth
Maximum phase change during one bit duration Baseband filtering to achieve continuous phase changes cos
Data x

90

to RF modulator

sin

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 412

4.2 Channel Coding

4.2.6 Propagation Environment


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

413

Radio propagation is characterised by dispersive multipath caused by reflection and scattering Moving MS causes Doppler spectrum Definition of propagation models in the time domain to allow channel simulations
TUxx (Typical Urban) RAxx (Rural Area) HTxx (Hilly Terrain) xx = speed in km/h

see also GSM 05.05, 11.20, 11.21

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 413

4.2 Channel Coding

4.2.7 Equalizing
RNE Fundamentals 1- -

414

Purpose: equalize distortions in transmission spectrum Adaptive filtering required


0.1

Filter parameters determined out of the training sequence Filter parameters change from burst to burst

Equalizer takes advantage from multipath propagation (path diversity)


BER 0.01

Equalizer none Alcatel MLSE 0.001 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Delay of second path [chips]

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 414

4.2 Channel Coding

4.2.8 Definition of Bit Error Rates


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

415

FER = Frame Erasure Rate


Ratio of corrupted frames, indicated by a wrong CRC (cyclic redundancy checksum) and BFI (bad frame indicator)

RBER = Residual Bit Error Rate


considering corrupted frames not recognized as bad frames

BER = total bit error rate Consideration of class 1 or 2 bits e.g. RBER1b, RBER2

see also GSM 05.05, 11.20, 11.21

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 415

4.2 Channel Coding

4.2.9 Speech Quality


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

416

BER
>0.01 <0.005 <0.0025 <0.0003 <0.0001

Quality
no communication bad marginal good excellent

Thresholds:
C/I: Ec/No: BTS (GSM900): HH (GSM900): BTS (GSM1800): HH (GSM1800): 9 dB 8 dB -104 dBm -102 dBm -104 dBm -100 dBm

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

HH - handheld

RXQUAL_0 RXQUAL_1 RXQUAL_2 RXQUAL_3 RXQUAL_4 RXQUAL_5 RXQUAL_6 RXQUAL_7

BER <0,2% 0,2%<BER<0,4% 0,4%<BER<0,8% 0,8%<BER<1,6% 1,6%<BER<3,2% 3,2%<BER<6,4% 6,4%<BER<12,8% 12,8%<BER

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 416

4.2 Channel Coding

4.2.10 Dependence of BER on Noise and Interference


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

417

Variation of BER1 over C/I Parameter: Ec/N0 How to find a quality figure?
BER1

BER1 for marginal speech quality: 0.25% required C/I 9 dB for TU50 environment but: signal must not be close to noise floor!

TU50

C/I [dB]

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 417

4.2 Channel Coding

4.2.13 Frequency Hopping (1)


RNE Fundamentals 1- 0 Lognormal fading -10 Raleygh fading

418

Received Power [dBm]

Problem: specific fading pattern for each used frequency Fast MS cope with the situation (due to signal processing) Slow MS suffer from fading holes Solution: change the fading pattern by frequency hopping

-20

-30

-40

-50

-60

-70

10.6

13.2

15.9

18.5

21.1

23.7

26.3

29.0

31.6

34.2

36.8

39.4

42.1

44.7

47.3

Fading holes

Distance [m]

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 418

49.9

0.1

2.8

5.4

8.0

4.2 Channel Coding

4.2.14 Frequency Hopping (2)


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

419

Variation of BER1 over Ec/N0 TU environment, flat fading, v = 0 km/h (worst case) Parameter: number of hopping frequencies Compensation with 4 hopping frequencies possible

BER

Ec/N0 [dB]

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 419

4.2 Channel Coding

4.2.15 The OSI Reference Model


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

420

Application layer 7 Presentation layer 6 Session layer

Transport layer 4 Network layer 3 Data link layer 2 Physical layer 1 End system Transportation system
04.07/08 08.58/4.0 8 04.05/06 08.56 04.04 08.54

End system

Definition in GSM recommendations: layers 1 to 3 Notion of "Physical" channels and "Logical" channels

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 420

4.2 Channel Coding

4.2.16 GSM Burst Types (1)


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

421

Normal Burst
For regular transmission

Frequency Correction Burst Synchronisation Burst

Contains 142 zeros (0) pure sine wave Allows synchronisation of the mobile's local oscillator Consists of an enlarged unique training sequence code (TSC) Contains the actual FN time synchronisation

Access Burst

Shortened burst (unique TSC and enlarged guard period) Timeslot overlapping avoided at BTS when MS accesses network "Filler" for unused BCCH timeslots BCCH permanently on air Similar to normal burst (defined mixed bits for data, no stealing flag)

Dummy Burst

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 421

4.2 Channel Coding

4.2.17 GSM Burst Types (2)


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

422

Normal burst
TB 3 57 data bits 1 26 bit training 1 sequence 57 data bits TB GP 3 8.25

Frequency correction burst


TB 3 142 fixed bits (pure sine wave) TB GP 3 8.25

Synchronisation burst
TB 3 39 data bits 64 bit training sequence 39 data bits TB GP 3 8.25

Access burst
TB 41 bit synchronisation 8 sequence 36 data bits TB 3 enlarged GP 68.25 bit

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 422

4.2 Channel Coding

4.2.18 Logical Channels


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

423

Traffic channel

Control channel

Speech TCH/FS TCH/HS

Data TCH/F9.6 TCH/F4.8 TCH/F2.4 TCH/H4.8 TCH/H2.4

Broadcast channel FCCH SCH BCCH

CCCH RACH PCH AGCH

Associated Dedicated channel channel FACCH SACCH SDCCH CBCH

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 423

4.2 Channel Coding

4.2.19 Possible Channel Combinations


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

424

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

TCH/F+FACCH/F+SACCH/TF TCH/H(0.1)+FACCH/H(0.1)+SACCH/TH(0.1) TCH/H(0.0)+FACCH/H(0.1)+SACCH/TH(0.1)+TCH/H(1.1) FCCH+SCH+BCCH+CCCH FCCH+SCH+BCCH+CCCH+SDCCH/4(0..3)+SACCH/C4(0..3) BCCH+CCCH SDCCH/8(0..7)+SACCH/C8(0..7)


CCCH = PCH+RACH+AGCH Combination 4 and 5 is only possible on TS0 of the first (BCCH) carrier Combination 6 is possible on TS2, TS4, or TS6 of the BCCH carrier

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 424

4.2 Channel Coding

4.2.20 Channel Mapping (1)


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

425

0 12 3 4 5 6 70 12 3 4 5 6 7 0 12 3 4 5 6 7 0 12 3 4

.......

.......
time
one TDMA frame = 4.616 ms

.......

Presentation of consecutive TDMA frames on the vertical axis

Information packages are always related to the same timeslot number! Bursts are transmitted and received every TDMA frame duration (4.616 ms)

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 425

4.2 Channel Coding

4.2.21 Channel Mapping (2)


RNE Fundamentals not combined BCCH
downlink 0
FCCH SCH

1- combined BCCH
downlink
FCCH SCH FCCH SCH S DCCH3 S DCCH3

426

TCH
up/ downlink 0
TCH TCH TCH TCH

SDCCH
downlink 0
SDCCH0 SDCCH0 SACCH5 S ACCH1

uplink
R ACH R ACH R ACH R ACH

uplink

uplink

BCCH R ACH R ACH

BCCH

BCCH R ACH R ACH R ACH R ACH TCH TCH SDCCH1 SDCCH1 SACCH6 S ACCH2 TCH

Control channels
Follows a 51-cycle Duration: 235.4 msec Consists mostly of four consecutive blocks Synchronisation with FCCH and SCH
10

R ACH CCCH R ACH R ACH R ACH FCCH SCH R ACH R ACH R ACH CCCH R ACH R ACH R ACH R ACH R ACH CCCH R ACH R ACH CCCH CCCH R ACH R ACH FCCH SCH FCCH SCH R ACH R ACH R ACH R ACH SDCCH0 R ACH R ACH R ACH R ACH CCCH R ACH R ACH SDCCH1 S DCCH1 R ACH R ACH FCCH SCH FCCH SCH R ACH R ACH R ACH R ACH SDCCH2 R ACH R ACH R ACH R ACH CCCH R ACH R ACH SDCCH3 S DCCH3 S DCCH0 S DCCH0 S DCCH2 R ACH R ACH R ACH R ACH R ACH R ACH R ACH R ACH R ACH R ACH R ACH R ACH S DCCH0 R ACH R ACH R ACH R ACH R ACH R ACH R ACH R ACH R ACH R ACH R ACH R ACH R ACH R ACH CCCH CCCH R ACH R ACH R ACH R ACH R ACH R ACH R ACH R ACH FCCH SCH FCCH SCH S ACCH1 S ACCH3 CCCH CCCH S ACCH0 S ACCH2

TCH TCH TCH TCH TCH 12 SACCH TCH TCH TCH TCH S DCCH0 TCH SDCCH4 TCH TCH TCH TCH TCH TCH TCH SDCCH5 SDCCH5 SDCCH4 S DCCH0 SDCCH3 SDCCH3

10

SDCCH2

SDCCH2

SACCH7

S ACCH3

20

FCCH SCH

R ACH R ACH R ACH R ACH

20
S DCCH1 S DCCH1

CCCH

25 0
SDCCH6 TCH TCH TCH SDCCH6

S DCCH2

S DCCH2

Traffic channels
Follows a 26-cycle Duration: 120 msec
30

S DCCH3 TCH TCH TCH TCH TCH SACCH0 TCH TCH TCH S DCCH5 TCH 12 SACCH TCH FCCH SCH FCCH SCH S DCCH1 R ACH CCCH R ACH R ACH R ACH R ACH CCCH R ACH S DCCH2 R ACH S DCCH2 TCH TCH SACCH1 SACCH3 TCH SACCH0 SACCH0 SACCH2 R ACH R ACH R ACH R ACH S DCCH1 TCH TCH S DCCH7 TCH SACCH3 TCH TCH SACCH7 TCH TCH TCH SACCH1 SACCH5 SACCH4 S DCCH4 FCCH SCH R ACH R ACH R ACH R ACH CCCH

S DCCH3

30

SDCCH7

SDCCH7

S DCCH4

S DCCH5

40

FCCH SCH

R ACH R ACH R ACH

40
S DCCH6 SACCH2 SACCH6 S DCCH6

S DCCH7

S ACCH4

50

R ACH

50

25

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 426

4.2 Channel Coding

4.2.22 TDMA Frame Structure for TCHs


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

427

Hyperframe Superframe Multiframe Frame Time slot

2048 superframes of 6.12 s duration 51 multiframes of 120 ms duration

3 h 28 m 53 s 6.12 s 120 ms 4.615 ms 0.577 ms

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25

TB 3

57 data bits

26 bit training 1 sequence

57 data bits

TB 3

GP 8.2 5

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 427

Abbreviations and Acronyms


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

428

AMR AMSS AN ARCS ARFCN AS AS ASMA ASMB AuC BC BCU BCLA BCR BCU BCCH BCF BG

Advanced Multi Rate (TC) Aeronautical Mobile Satellite Services Antenna Network (BTS) Average Reuse Cluster Size Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Access Switch (BSC) Alarm Surveillance (O&M) A-ter Submultiplexer A A-ter Submultiplexer B Authentication Center Broadcast Broadcast Unit BSC Clock A Broadcast Register Broadcast Unit Broadcast Common Control Channel (GSM TS) Base station Control Function (BTS) Border Gate (GPRS)

BIE BIEC BIUA BPA BSC BSIC BSS BSSGP BTS CAE CAL CBC CBCH CBE CCCH CCU

Base Station Interface Equipment Base Station Interface Equipment (BSC) Base Station Interface Unit A Back Panel Assembly Base Station Controller Base Transceiver Station Identity Code Base Station (sub)System Base Station System GPRS Protocol (GPRS) Base Transceiver Station Customer Application Engineering Current Alarm List (O&M) Cell Broadcast Center Cell Broadcast Channel (GSM TS) Cell Broadcast Entity Common Control Channel (GSM TS) Channel Coding Unit

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 428

Abbreviations and Acronyms [cont.]


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

429

CDMA CE CEK C/I CLK CLSI CMA CMDA CMFA CPR CRC CS CS CU DCE DCN DL

Code Division Multiple Access Control Element (BSC) Control Element Kernel Carrier to Interferer ratio Clock Custom Large Scale Integrated circuit Configuration Management Application (O&M) Common Memory Disk A Common Memory Flash A Common Processor (Type: CPRA, CPRC) Cyclic Redundancy Check Circuit Switching (Telecom) Coding Scheme (GPRS): CS-1, CS-2, CS-3, CS-4 Carrier Unit (BTS) Data Circuit Terminating Equipment Data Communication Network DownLink

DLS DMA DRFU DRX DSE DSN DTX DTC DTE EDGE EI EML EPROM ETSI FPE FR

Data Load Segment Direct Memory Access Dual Rate Frame Unit Discontinuous Reception (GSM TS) Digital Switching Element Digital Switching Network Discontinuous Transmission (GSM TS) Digital Trunk Controller (Type: DTCA, DTCC) Data Terminal Equipment Enhanced Data rates for GSM Evolution Extension interface Element Management Level Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory European Telecom Standard Institute Functional and Protective Earth Full Rate (GSM TS)

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 429

Abbreviations and Acronyms [cont.]


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

430

FR FRDN FU FW GCR GGSN GMLC GMM GMSC GPRS GPU GS-1 GS-2 GSL GSM GSM TS HAL HDSL HDLC

Switch to notes view!

Frame Relay (Telecom) Frame Relay Data Network (Telecom) Frame Unit (BTS) Firmware Group Call Register Gateway GPRS Support Node (GPRS) Gateway Mobile Location Center GPRS Mobility Management (GPRS) Gateway Mobile Switching Center General Packet Radio Service GPRS Packet Unit Group Switch of stage 1 (BSC) Group Switch of stage 2 (BSC) GPRS Signalling Link Global System for Mobile Communications GSM Technical Specification Historical Alarm List (O&M) High rate Digital Subscriber Line High Level Datalink Control

HLR HMI HO HR HW IDR ILCS IMT IND IP ISDN IT LA LAC LAN LED LEO LCS

Home Location Register Human Machine Interface HandOver Half Rate Hardware Internal Directed Retry ISDN Link Controller Installation and Maintenance Terminal (MFS) Indoor (BTS) Internet Protocol Integrated Services Data Network Intelligent Terminal Location Area (GSM TS) Location Area Code (GSM TS) Local Area Network Light Emitting Diode Low Earth Orbit (Satellite) Location Services

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 430

Abbreviations and Acronyms [cont.]


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

431

PCH PCM PCU PDCH PDN PDU PLL PLMN PMA PMC

Switch to notes view!

PPCH PRACH Prec PRC PSDN

Paging CHannel (GSM TS) Pulse Coded Modulation Packet Control Unit (GPRS) Packet Data CHannel Packet Data Network (Telecom) Protocol Data Unit (generic terminology) Phase Locked Loop Public Land Mobile Network Prompt Maintenance Alarm (O&M) Permanent Measurement Campaign (O&M) Packet Paging CHannel (GPRS) Packet Random Access CHannel (GPRS) Received Power Provisioning Radio Configuration (O&M) Packet Switching Data Network (Telecom)

PSTN PTP-CNLS QoS RA RACH RAM RCP RLC RLP RML RNO RNP RSL

Public Switching Telephone Network (Telecom) Point To Point CoNnectionLeSs data transfer (GPRS) Quality of Service Radio Access Random Access CHannel (GSM TS) Random Access Memory Radio Control Point Radio Link Control (GPRS) Radio Link Protocol (GSM TS) Radio Management Level Radio Network Optimisation Radio Network Planning Radio Signalling Link

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 431

Abbreviations and Acronyms [cont.]


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

432

RTS RxLev RxQual SACCH

Switch to notes view!

SAU SC SCC SCP SCCP SCSI SDCCH SDU SGSN SIEA

Radio Time Slot Received Level Received Quality Slow Associated Control Channel (GSM TS) Subrack assembly unit (BSC) Supervised Configuration (O&M) Serial Communication Controller Service Control Point Signalling Connection Control Part Small Computer Systems Interface Standalone Dedicated Control Channel (GSM TS) Service Data Unit (generic terminology) Serving GPRS Support Node (GPRS) SCSI Interface Extension A

SM SMLC SMP SMS SMS-CB SM-GMSC SRAM SRS SS7 SSD SSP SW SWEL TBF TAF

Submultiplexer Serving Mobile Location Center Service Management Point Short Message Service Short Message Service - Cell Broadcast Short Message Gateway Mobile Switching Center Static RAM SubRate Switch Signalling System ITU-T N7 (ex CCITT) Solid State Disk Service Switching Point Software Switch Element Temporary Block Flow (GPRS) Terminal Adaptor Function

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 432

Abbreviations and Acronyms [cont.]


RNE Fundamentals 1- -

433

TC TC TCC TCH TCIL TCSM TCU TDMA TFO TFTS TLD TMN TRAC TRAU TRCU TRE TRS TRU

Switch to notes view!

Transcoder Terminating Call Trunk Controller Chip Traffic CHannel (GSM TS) TransCoder Internal Link TransCoder / SubMultiplexer equipment TRX Control Unit (Type: TCUA, TCUC) Time Division Multiple Access Tandem Free Operation (TC) Terrestrial Flight Telecom Systems Top Level Design Telecommunication Management Network Trunk Access Circuit Transcoder and Rate Adapter Unit Transcoder Unit Transceiver Equipment Technical Requirement Specification Top Rack Unit

TRX TS TS TSS TSCA TSU TU UL UMTS USSD VBS VGCS VLR VPLMN VSWR WAN WAP WBC

Transceiver Time Slot Technical Specification (GSM TS) Time Space Switch Transmission Sub-System Controller A (BSC) Terminal Sub Unit (BSC) Terminal Unit (BSC) UpLink Universal Mobile Transmission System Unstructured Supplementary Services Data Voice Broadcast Service Voice Group Code Service Visitor Location Register Visited PLMN Voltage Standing Wave Ratio (BTS) Wide Area Network Wireless Application Protocol Wide Band Combiner

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 433

RNE Fundamentals -

1- -

434

End of Module

Evolium BSS - RNE Fundamentals

All rights reserved 2005, Alcatel

3FL 11820 ACAA WBZZA Edition 3 Section 1 - Module - Page 434

Das könnte Ihnen auch gefallen